Lincoln 2007 Navigator

Product's Documents

Below are documents related to this product, you can read online or download:

User Manual

This is the main product document for model LINCOLN 2007 NAVIGATOR.

The file format is pdf, 312 pages, you can download this manual here .

background
Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 10
Warning lights and chimes 10
Gauges 15
Entertainment Systems 18
AM/FM stereo with CDX6/MP3 18
Auxiliary input jack 24
Rear seat controls 25
Satellite radio information 29
Climate Controls 33
Rear window defroster 38
Lights 39
Headlamps 39
Turn signal control 42
Bulb replacement 44
Driver Controls 49
Windshield wiper/washer control 49
Steering wheel adjustment 50
Power windows 55
Mirrors 58
Speed control 61
Moon roof 66
Message center 71
Locks and Security 89
Keys 89
Locks 89
Table of Contents
1
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
background
Seating and Safety Restraints 106
Seating 106
Safety restraints 119
Airbags 133
Child restraints 142
Tires, Wheels and Loading 157
Tire information 159
Tire inflation 162
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 174
Vehicle loading 178
Trailer towing 184
Recreational towing 191
Driving 192
Starting 192
Brakes 196
Traction Control™/AdvanceTrac 199
Air suspension 204
Transmission operation 205
Roadside Emergencies 221
Getting roadside assistance 221
Hazard flasher switch 222
Fuel pump shut-off switch 223
Fuses and relays 224
Changing tires 232
Lug nut torque 241
Jump starting 241
Wrecker towing 248
Customer Assistance 250
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 256
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) 257
Cleaning 258
Table of Contents
2
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
background
Maintenance and Specifications 265
Engine compartment 267
Engine oil 270
Battery 273
Engine coolant 275
Fuel information 281
Air filter(s) 293
Part numbers 296
Maintenance product specifications and capacities 297
Engine data 300
Accessories 303
Index 305
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2006 Ford Motor Company
Table of Contents
3
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
background
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln. Please take the time to
get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The
more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
In the United States: www.ford.com
In Canada: www.ford.ca
In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
In Australia: www.ford.com.au
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
4
background
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a
trailer. Additionally, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a
trailer, do not drive over 70 mph (112 km/h) and do not make starts at
full throttle. This style of driving will help the engine and other parts of
your vehicle break in at the heavier loads. For more detailed information
about towing a trailer, refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during the
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these additives
may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
5
background
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle event data recorders are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
6
background
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.
Middle East/North Africa vehicle specific information
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this
Owner’s Guide for all other required information and warnings.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
7
background
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side Child Seat
Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Powertrain Malfunction Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
8
background
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Symbol
Panic Alarm Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN
Emission System Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
9
background
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Note: Some Warning Lights are reconfigurable telltale (RTT) indicator
lights and will illuminate in the Message Center Display and function the
same as the warning light.
Service engine soon: The
indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the ON
position to check the bulb and to
indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing. Normally, the Service engine soon light will stay on until the
engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the Service engine soon light blinks eight
times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. See the
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
10
background
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Powertrain malfunction/reduced
power (RTT) (if equipped):
Displays when the engine has
defaulted to a ’limp-home’ operation.
Report the fault to a dealer at the
earliest opportunity.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the
brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
P !
BRAKE
ABS
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
11
background
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound when a
malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A BeltMinder
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and safety restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the BeltMinder chime feature.
Charging system (RTT): Displays
when the battery is not charging
properly.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Engine oil pressure (RTT):
Displays when the oil pressure falls
below the normal range. Refer to
Engine oil in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
Engine coolant temperature
(RTT): Displays when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and
let it cool. Refer to Engine coolant
in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
12
background
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure is
low. If the light remains ON at start
up or while driving, the tire pressure
should be checked. Refer to Inflating
Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When the ignition
is first turned to ON, the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the
bulb is working. If the light does not turn ON or begins to flash, have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer. For more information on this
system, refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Low fuel (RTT) (if equipped):
Displays when the fuel level in the
fuel tank is at or near empty (refer
to Fuel gauge in this chapter).
Check fuel cap (RTT)
(if equipped): Displays when the
fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with
this light on may cause the Service
engine soon warning light to come
on. Refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
Low washer fluid (RTT)
(if equipped): Displays when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
O/D off: Illuminates when the
overdrive function of the
transmission has been turned off,
refer to the Driving chapter. If the
light flashes steadily or does not illuminate, have the transmission
serviced soon, or damage may occur.
AdvanceTrac (RTT)
(if equipped): Displays when the
AdvanceTrac with RSC system is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately by
your authorized dealer.
O/D
OFF
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
13
background
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
Four wheel drive (RTT)
(if equipped): Displays when
four-wheel drive is engaged. If the
light fails to illuminate when the
ignition is turned ON, or remains on,
have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Four wheel drive auto (RTT)
(if equipped): Displays when
four-wheel drive automatic mode is
engaged. If the light fails to
illuminate when the ignition is
turned ON, or remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
Door ajar (RTT) (if equipped):
Displays when the ignition is in the
ON position and any door, liftgate or
the liftgate glass is open.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
14
background
Parking brake ON warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5
km/h).
Turn signal chime: Sounds when the turn signal lever has been
activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is driven
more than 1.5 miles (2.4 km).
Message center activation chime: Sounds when some warning
messages appears in the message center display for the first time.
Overspeed chime (if equipped): Sounds when the vehicle speed
reaches 120 km/h (75 mph) or higher.
Reverse warning chime (if equipped): Sounds when the vehicle is in
reverse. Refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
15
background
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch
off the engine and let the engine cool. Refer to Engine coolant in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle. Refer to
Message Center in the Drivers
Controls chapter on how to switch
the display from Metric to English.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
Press and release the message
center INFO button until “TRIP”
appears in the display (this
represents the trip mode). Press the
control again to select Trip A and Trip B features. Press and hold the
RESET button for two seconds to reset.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
16
background
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The ignition should be in the OFF position while the vehicle is being
refueled. When the gauge first indicates empty, there is a small amount
of reserve fuel in the tank. When refueling the vehicle from empty
indication, the amount of fuel that can be added will be less than the
advertised capacity due to the reserve fuel.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
Battery voltage gauge: Indicates
the battery voltage when the
ignition is in the ON position. If the
pointer moves and stays outside the
normal operating range, have the
vehicle’s electrical system checked
by your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Engine oil pressure gauge:
Indicates engine oil pressure. The
needle should stay in the normal
operating range (between “L” and
“H”). If the needle falls below the
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and check the engine oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil
level is correct, have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
17
background
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM In-dash six CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound system
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window controls, radio and moon roof (if equipped) may
be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until
either front door is opened.
THX: Your vehicle may be equipped
with the THX II certified premium
audio system. This system creates
optimal acoustic quality for all
seating positions and road
conditions. The system offers an
advanced speaker system, amplifier,
subwoofer and equalization.
1. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until
sound returns. PRESET SAVED will appear in the display. You may store
up to 18 stations, six presets in AM, FM1 and FM2.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
18
background
In satellite Radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
2.
(Eject): Press to eject the
current CD/MP3. To eject a specific
CD/MP3, press
and the
corresponding memory preset. Press
and hold
to autoeject all discs
in the system.
3. TUNE: In radio mode, turn to
go up/down the frequency band in
individual increments.
In MP3 mode, with folder mode
active, turn to advance to the next/previous MP3 folder.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
SEEK to tune to
the next/previous channel.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
/ to scroll through the list of
available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to
Category Mode under Menu for further information.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
4. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly
to scroll through the following
modes:
Setting the clock: Your vehicle is equipped with an in-dash clock. Refer
to Clock in the Driver Controls Chapter for instructions on how to set
the time.
CATEGORY (satellite radio, if equipped): Press MENU until the
currently active category appears in the display (CATEGORY MODE). In
CATEGORY MODE, press
/ to scroll through the list of available
Sirius channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Once you have
selected a category, use
SEEK to select the next/previous
channel in that specific category. Press and hold the SCAN button to
hear a brief sampling of the satellite radio channels in the selected
category. Set category to CATEGORY ALL to seek or scan all available
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
19
background
SIRIUS satellite radio channels. To select a different category, press
MENU until the category appears in the display. Press
/ to select
a different category. You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all
available Sirius categories and channels.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
RBDS ON/OFF: Press
/ to turn RBDS ON or OFF.
Program Type: If RBDS is ON, press
/ to find the desired
program type, then use SEEK or SCAN to search for FM radio
stations broadcasting the desired program type.
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System): Available in FM mode only.
Allows you to search RBDS-equipped stations for certain categories of
music or announcements. With RBDS ON, you may select from: Info
(Information), Alert, Test, Religious, R&B, Classical, Jazz, Oldies,
Country, Top 40, Soft and Rock as described under Program Type
above. When the desired category appears in the display, press
SEEK to initiate the search. The system will cycle through the FM
frequency band searching for stations broadcasting the selected category
type. If the desired program type is not found after searching the
frequency band three times, the search will stop. The announcement
categories are as follows:
Alert: Searches for RBDS stations actively broadcasting important
messages relating to weather or government emergencies.
Test: Searches for RBDS stations actively broadcasting a test message.
Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
Use
/ to turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Bass: Press
/ to adjust the bass setting.
Treble: Press
/ to adjust the treble setting.
Balance: Press / to adjust the audio between the right and left
speakers.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
20
background
Fade: Press / to adjust the audio between the front and rear
speakers.
Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume automatically changes slightly
with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise. Use
/
to adjust. Recommended level is 1–3. Level 7 is the maximum setting.
Occupancy mode: Use
/ to select and optimize sound for ALL
SEATS, DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS.
Compression: Available in CD mode, this feature brings soft and loud
CD passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press MENU
until compression status is displayed. Press
/ to turn the feature
on/off.
5. Select: These controls are used
in Menu mode to select various
settings/options.
6. Play/Pause/Mute: In radio
mode, press to mute the playing
media. AUDIO MUTE will appear in
the display. Press again to return to the playing media.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to pause the playing media. CDX PAUSE will
appear in the display. Press again to return to the playing media.
7. SEEK
: In radio or CD/MP3
mode,press to access the next
strong station or track.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press SEEK
to seek to the
next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.),
press SEEK
to seek to the next channel in the selected category.
Press and hold SEEK
to fast seek through the next channels.
In TEXT MODE, press SEEK to view the additional display text
when “>” is active in the display.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
/ to select a category.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
8. FWD (Fast Forward): Press
FWD to manually advance in a
CD/MP3 track.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
21
background
9. TEXT/SCAN: In radio mode,
when listening to a RBDS-equipped
station, press and hold for a brief
sampling of radio stations.
In CD/MP3 mode, press and release to view the track title, artist name
or disc title. Press and hold for a brief sampling of all tracks on the
current disc.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and toggle between channel name/channel category and
the current song title/artist.
In TEXT MODE, sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
to view the
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press
SEEK
to view the previous display text.
10. REV (Reverse): Press REV to
manually reverse in a CD track.
11.
SEEK: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press to access the
previous strong station or track.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
SEEK to seek to the
previous channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News,
etc.), press SEEK to seek to the previous channel in the selected
category. Press and hold
SEEK to fast seek through the previous
channels.
In TEXT MODE press
SEEK to view the previous display text
when “<” is active in the display.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
12. SHUFFLE: Press to play all
tracks on the current disc in random
order.
13. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
22
background
14. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If
a CD is already loaded into the
system, CD play will begin where it
ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the display.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Dirty, warped or damaged CDs, irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further
information.
15. AUX: Press to access AUX
modes. If no auxiliary sources are
available, NO DVD will be displayed.
To return to radio mode, press AM/FM.
If equipped with Satellite Radio, press AUX to cycle through SAT1, SAT2
and SAT3 modes.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
16. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a
“nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
17. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3 label
side up.
18. LOAD: Press to load a CD/MP3.
Press LOAD and a memory preset
to load to a specific slot. Press and
hold to autoload up to six CD/MP3s.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
23
background
Auxiliary input jack
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way
to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal
performance, please observe the
following instructions when
attaching your portable music
device to the audio system.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
24
background
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in
the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same way manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
Rear seat radio controls (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with rear seat radio controls. This feature allows
front and middle seat passengers to listen to different media sources
(radio, CD or DVD) simultaneously. (However, the front and middle-seat
passengers cannot listen to two different radio stations at the same
time.)
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
25
background
1. MEDIA: Push repeatedly to cycle
through available playing medias
such as AM, FM1, FM2, CD, SAT1,
SAT2, SAT3 (Satellite radio if
equipped), or DVD (if equipped). If
in Dual Play mode, SHARED
illuminates in the radio display when
the front and rear modes are set to
the same media.
2. VOLUME: Press to increase
(
) or decrease ( ) the volume
level in the headphones.
From the rear seat controls, volume control can be set no higher than
the current radio setting unless the speakers are turned off.
3.
: In radio mode, press and release to advance through memory
presets. In CD mode, press and hold to seek to the previous track.
4. Headphone jacks:
5.
: In radio mode, press and release to scroll through memory
presets. In CD mode, press and hold to seek to the next track.
6. Auxiliary audio input jack: Use to plug in and play auxiliary audio
sources.
7. -: In CD mode, press to access the previous CD.
8. +: In CD mode, press to access the next CD.
9.
/ : Press to turn the rear speakers on (Single Play mode) or off
(Dual Play mode).
When the rear seat controls are activated, rear seat passengers can use
the controls to change the playing media for all passengers (Single Play
mode). In this mode, all speakers will play audio from the same media
source for all passengers to hear. To activate the rear seat radio controls:
Press the memory preset controls
3 and 5 at the same time. A
headphone icon
will illuminate
in the radio display, indicating the rear seat radio controls are active.
Press memory preset controls 3 and 5 a second time to deactivate the
rear seat controls. The headphone icon
will turn off in the radio
display.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
26
background
If there is a discrepancy between the rear seat controls and the front
audio controls (such as both trying to listen to the same playing media),
the front audio system will receive the desired selection.
To activate Dual Play mode (rear seat passengers listen to a different
playing media than the front seat passengers):
Press the speaker/headphone control.
Press the MEDIA Control to change audio sources (for headphone
mode only)
Use the other controls to make adjustments to the playing media.
Dual Play mode may also be
activated by pressing memory
presets 2 and 4 simultaneously on
the front audio controls.
The rear speakers mute and rear seat passengers have audio (for their
selected media) available through their headphones.
Using headphones/Dual Play mode
Plug a 3.5 mm headphone (not included) into the
jack. Press the
speaker on/off control to operate the headphones. DUAL PLAY
illuminates in the radio display and the fade control is disabled, signaling
that Dual Play has been activated.
The rear speakers will cut out once the speaker on/off control is pressed.
The front speaker will remain playing for the front passengers. Press the
control again to deactivate the headphones. SINGLE PLAY illuminates in
the radio display and the fade control is enabled, signaling that Dual Play
mode has been deactivated.
To enable Dual Play, the rear seat controls must be active
and
illuminated in the radio display.
Parental control
Press the memory preset controls 3
and 5 simultaneously on the front
audio controls to disable the rear
seat controls. They will remain disabled until the front seat passengers
“enable” them again by simultaneously pressing the 3 and 5 preset
controls. The settings of the front seat controls will always override
those of the rear seat controls.
1 2 3 4 5 6
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
27
background
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your authorized dealer for further information.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
28
background
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels
over the internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
29
background
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
Radio Display Condition Action Required
ACQUIRING Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
SAT FAULT Internal module or
system failure
present.
If this message does
not clear within a short
period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
INVALID CHNL Channel no longer
available.
This previously
available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not
available for this
channel.
Contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
channel or tune to
another channel.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
30
background
Radio Display Condition Action Required
NO TEXT Artist information not
available.
Artist information not
available at this time on
this channel. The
system is working
properly.
NO TEXT Song title information
not available.
Song title information
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
NO TEXT Category information
not available.
Category information
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from
the SIRIUS satellite or
SIRIUS tower to the
vehicle antenna.
You are in a location
that is blocking the
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,
tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
UPDATING Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS Satellite
Radio.
Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
subscription issues.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
31
background
FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System
(FES). This is a DVD system for the rear seat passengers which includes
a DVD player, wireless infrared headphones and a remote control. For
more information, please refer to the Family Entertainment System
supplement.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Navigation System. Refer to the
Navigation supplement for further information.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
32
background
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH REAR
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CLIMATE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
1.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents. Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield.
2. Rear temperature control: Press to enable the auxiliary system and
set the desired rear cabin airflow temperature with the front control. The
rear cabin airflow temperature will match the driver airflow temperature
setting when only the center rear temperature bar (REAR)is
illuminated. The rear cabin airflow temperature will be warmer or cooler
than the driver airflow temperature setting when more than one rear
temperature bar (REAR) is illuminated.
3. Passenger temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the
temperature for the passenger in the front of the vehicle.
4.
R
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more
information.
5. R
Rear fan speed control: Press to enable the auxiliary system
or to adjust the rear fan speed from the front control. The rear fan speed
settings available are 4, 3, 2, 1 and O (OFF).
6.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
in the vehicle cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air can be
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
33
background
engaged manually in any airflow selection except . Recirculated air
may turn off automatically in all airflow selections.
7. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in AUTO, , and .
8.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor
vents.
9.
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
10.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor
vents.
11.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
12. Manual override controls: Allows you to change the system
operation. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
13. F
Front fan speed control: Press to manually increase or
decrease the fan speed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
14. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
15. Driver temperature control: Press to increase or decrease the
temperature on the driver side of the cabin. Sets the passenger side
temperature also when DUAL is disengaged. Note: The recommended
vehicle cabin setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C).
Dual temperature control: Press and hold AUTO to
engage/disengage separate passenger side temperature control.
16. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation, and select the
desired temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
17. EXT: Press to display the outside temperature. Press again to display
the cabin temperature settings.
18. REAR: Press to enable the control located in the rear seat. Press
again to turn the auxiliary system off.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
34
background
Dual automatic temperature control with heated and cooled seats
and rear passenger compartment climate control (if equipped)
1.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents. Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield.
2. Rear temperature control: Press to enable the auxiliary system and
set the desired rear cabin airflow temperature with the front control. The
rear cabin airflow temperature will match the driver airflow temperature
setting when only the center rear temperature bar (REAR)is
illuminated. The rear cabin airflow temperature will be warmer or cooler
than the driver airflow temperature setting when more than one rear
temperature bar (REAR) is illuminated.
3. Passenger temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the
temperature for the passenger in the front of the vehicle.
4.
R
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more
information.
5. R
Rear fan speed control: Press to enable the auxiliary system
or to adjust the rear fan speed from the front control. The rear fan speed
settings available are 4, 3, 2, 1 and O (OFF).
6.
Passenger heated seat control: Press once to activate the high
heat setting (3 indicator lights). Continue pressing to scroll through the
other settings; medium heat (2 indicator lights), low heat (1 indicator
light) or off.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
35
background
7. Passenger cooled seat control: Press once to activate the high
cool setting (3 indicator lights). Continue pressing to scroll through the
other settings; medium cool (2 indicator lights), low cool (1 indicator
light) or off.
8. REAR: Press to enable the control located in the rear seat. Press
again to turn the auxiliary system off.
9.
Airflow direction control: Press to toggle through the air
distribution modes listed below. The selected mode will be shown in the
display.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel and the floor vents.
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and the floor
vents.
10.
Driver heated seat control: Press once to activate the high
heat setting (3 indicator lights). Continue pressing to scroll through the
other settings; medium heat (2 indicator lights), low heat (1 indicator
light) or off.
11.
Driver cooled seat control: Press once to activate the high
cool setting (3 indicator lights). Continue pressing to scroll through the
other settings; medium cool (2 indicator lights), low cool (1 indicator
light) or off.
12. F
Front fan speed control: Press to manually increase or
decrease the fan speed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
13. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
14. Driver temperature control: Press to increase or decrease the
temperature on the driver side of the cabin. Sets the passenger side
temperature also when DUAL is disengaged. Note: The recommended
vehicle cabin setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C).
15. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation, and select the
desired temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
16. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in AUTO, , and .
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
36
background
17. EXT: Press to display the outside temperature. Press again to display
cabin temperature settings.
18.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air
recirculation in the vehicle cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the
amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also
help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
Recirculated air can be engaged manually in any airflow selection
except
. Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow
selections.
Operating tips
To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
air flow selector in the O (OFF) or (in cold weather) MAX A/C
position.
Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
MAX A/C or O (OFF) when the vehicle is parked. This allows the
vehicle to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.
Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
37
background
AUXILIARY CLIMATE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed: Turn to select the
desired fan speed.
2. Temperature/mode selection:
The distribution of air from the
overhead and floor registers is based
on the temperature selected. Turn
to select for comfort.
To use the rear climate controls,
ensure that REAR is pressed on the main climate control face.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear defroster control is located
on the climate control panel and
works to clear the rear window of
fog and thin ice.
The ignition must be in the 3 (RUN)
position to operate the rear window
defroster.
The rear defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the
ignition is turned to the 1 (LOCK) position. To manually turn off the
defroster before 10 minutes have passed, push the control again.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
38
background
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control to the
first position
to turn on the
parking lamps. Rotate to the second
position
to turn on the
headlamps.
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately 20
seconds or on vehicles equipped
with a message center, you can
select a delay from 0–180 seconds,
after the ignition switch is turned to
OFF.
To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise.
To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to OFF.
Foglamp control
The headlamp control also operates
the foglamps. The foglamps can be
turned on when the headlamp
control is in the
, or
positions and the high beams are
not turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp
indicator light
will illuminate.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
39
background
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the foglamps on at full intensity output. To activate:
the ignition must be in the ON position and
the headlamp control must be in the OFF or Parking lamps position.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel when exterior
lights are on.
Rotate the thumbwheel from left
to right to brighten the
instrument panel.
Rotate the thumbwheel from right
to left to dim the instrument panel.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
40
background
Rotate fully to the right (past detent) to turn on interior lamps.
Rotate to the left position (past detent) to turn off the interior lamps
and will also disable the illuminated entry feature.
At dusk and dawn, the LEDs are illuminated at six times the normal
intensity to enhance contrast and visibility. The system automatically
“dims down” as ambient light reaches the dash-mounted sensor.
The interior control lights dim progressively in four steps until they
reach nighttime operating levels. At all illumination levels, the lights can
be dimmed using the thumbwheel on the instrument panel.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
Before aim adjustment, disable the air suspension system. Refer to
Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
(1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
(2) Center height of lamp to
ground
(3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
(4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the lens) to
the ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape works
well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
41
background
right. If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line, the beam will
need to be adjusted so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal
reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then use a Phillips
#2 screwdriver to turn the adjuster
either counterclockwise (to adjust
down) or clockwise (to adjust up)
aligning the upper edge of the light
pattern up to the horizontal line.
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT
REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE
AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.
7. Repeat Steps 3–5 for the other headlamp.
8. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front row map lamps
To turn on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The
front row map lamp lights when:
any door is opened.
the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated until the
courtesy lamps come on.
the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is OFF.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
42
background
Front row map/dome lamp (if equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
any door is opened,
the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of
the lens.
Second row map lamps
The second row map lamps are
located in the headliner above the
second row seats.
The second row map lamp lights
when:
any door is opened,
the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the courtesy lamps come on, and
any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is OFF.
Press the controls to activate the lamps.
Rear cargo lamp
The dome lamp lights when:
any door is opened, and the
switch is in the middle position.
the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated until the
courtesy lamps come on.
any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and ignition is OFF
(and switch is in the middle
position).
With the ignition key in the ACC or ON position, the rear dome lamp can
be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
43
background
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America to ensure
lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The
correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp
assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Function Number of bulbs Trade number
Headlamps (low and
high-beam)
2 *See your dealer
Front park lamps 2 3157 A (amber)
Front turn lamps 2 3157 K
Front sidemarker 2 168 (amber)
Foglamps 2 800
Front row map lamps 2 1600XB
2nd row reading lamp 1 1600XB
Rear cargo lamp 1 211–2XB
Rear turn/tail/brake lamps 4 4057K
Backup lamps 2 921
Supplemental tail lamps 4 906
Approach lamps 2 906
Mirror turn signal lamps 2 906 (amber)
License lamp 2 168
High-mount brake lamp 5 W5W
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
* For vehicles with HID (high intensity discharge) lamps, see your
authorized dealer for service.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
44
background
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing HID headlamp bulbs
The low/high beam headlamps on your vehicle may use a “high intensity
discharge” source. These lamps operate at a high voltage. The bulb is
NOT replaceable. When the bulb is burned out, the lamp assembly must
be replaced by your authorized dealer.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal/sidemarker bulbs
The front parking lamp/turn signal/sidemarker bulbs are located in the
headlamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb:
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. At the back of the headlamp lens,
remove the two headlamp assembly
bolts.
4. Pull the headlamp assembly
forward slightly to expose the
electrical connectors.
5. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove.
6. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
7. To complete installation of the
parking lamp/turn signal assembly,
follow the removal procedures in
reverse order.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
45
background
Replacing foglamp bulbs
1. From underneath the vehicle,
rotate the harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise, to remove from
the fog lamp assembly.
2. Carefully disconnect the bulb
from the harness assembly via the
two snap clips.
Install the new bulb in reverse
order.
Replacing tail/stop/turn/backup lamp bulbs
The tail/stop/turn/backup lamp bulbs are located in the same portion of
the tail lamp assembly, one just below the other. Follow the same steps
to replace either bulb:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Open the liftgate to expose the
lamp assembly screws.
3. Remove the two screws from the
lamp assembly.
4. Carefully pry the lamp assembly
away from the vehicle, by pulling
the assembly directly straight out, to
expose the bulb socket. DO NOT
TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS.
5. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
6. Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb.
7. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
8. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws.
Replacing supplemental tail lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
2. Open the liftgate and remove interior trim panel.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
46
background
3. Remove four nuts from the lamp
assembly.
4. Carefully pry the lamp assembly
away from the vehicle, by pulling
the assembly directly straight out, to
expose the bulb socket. DO NOT
TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY
SIDEWAYS.
5. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
6. Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb.
7. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
8. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with four nuts.
9. Install the interior trim panel.
High-mount brakelamp
To change the high-mount
brakelamp bulbs:
1. Remove the two screws holding
the lamp assembly in place.
2. Pull the lamp assembly straight
out.
3. Disconnect the wire harness.
4. Depress the four tabs that hold
the light assembly on, one at a time,
and pull the black bulb carrier away
from the lamp.
5. Pull the old bulb out and replace
with the new bulb.
6. Snap the black bulb carrier into
the lamp assembly.
7. Connect the wire harness.
8. Install the lamp assembly with
two screws.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
47
background
Replacing license plate lamp bulb
The license plate bulbs are located in the license plate housing assembly
on the liftgate. To change the license plate bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the license lamp screw
from the assembly.
3. Pull the lamp down and twist the
bulb socket counterclockwise.
Remove the bulb socket from the
lamp.
4. Pull out the old bulb and push in
the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket in the lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
6. Install the lamp assembly and secure it with the retaining screw.
Approach lamp/mirror turn signal bulb removal (if equipped)
To change the bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then fold
the mirror forward.
2. Press the clip and pull the turn
signal lens down to remove it from
the mirror assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb assembly
from the lens.
4. Remove and replace the bulb.
5. Align the turn signal lens clip
with the slot in the mirror assembly and carefully press the lens in.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
48
background
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Speed dependent wipers: When
the wiper control is on, the speed of
the wipers will automatically adjust
with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the
wipers will go.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
Select:
INT 2 Normal speed operation of
rear wiper.
INT 1 Intermittent operation of
rear wiper.
OFF Rear wiper and washer off.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
49
background
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer
control to either
position.
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT 2
or OFF position.
POWER TILT STEERING
The steering column can be
adjusted manually by moving the
two-way rocker adjustment control
located below the turn signal/wiper
control stalk. Hold the control to
adjust.
The tilt function is adjusted by
depressing the control up or down.
Easy entry/exit feature
When you remove the key from the ignition, the column will move to the
full up position if this feature is activated through the Message Center.
Refer to the Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter. When the
key is inserted into the ignition, the column will return to the previous
setting.
Note: The easy entry/exit feature will prevent the steering wheel from
returning to the memory position until the key is inserted into the
ignition.
Memory feature
The steering column positions are saved when doing a memory set
function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features
when a memory position is selected through the remote entry
transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver’s door
(if equipped with memory feature). Refer to Memory seats/steering
column/mirrors/adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter.
If the steering column adjustment control is pressed during memory
recall it will cancel the automatic operation and the column will respond
to manual adjustment of the control.
Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle is moving.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
50
background
On vehicles with memory feature, to prevent damage to the steering
column, the steering column is designed to set a stopping position just
short of the end of the column position. If the steering column
encounters an object while moving up or down, a new stopping position
will be set. To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position:
After encountering the new stopping position, press the steering
column control again to override.
Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the column
position.
Continue pressing the control for approximately 2 seconds. You will
feel the steering column bounce back slightly.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.
Slide on rod feature
(if equipped)
Rotate the visor towards the side
window and extend it rearward for
additional sunlight coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
51
background
Forward storage bin (if equipped)
The storage compartment may be
used to store a pair of sunglasses.
Press the release area on the rear
edge of the bin door to open the
storage compartment. The door will
open to full open position.
Conversation mirror (if equipped)
On double bin overhead consoles, the conversation mirror allows the
driver to view the rear seating area.
This does not replace the rear view mirror.
Press the release area on the rear
edge of the bin door to open the
conversation mirror. The door will
open to full open position.
The rear view mirror may have to
be adjusted to its lower arm position
to prevent interference when the
conversation mirror is extended
down.
Power quarter rear windows
Press the
portion of the
control to open the power rear
quarter windows.
Press the left portion of the control
to close the power rear quarter
windows.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
52
background
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power rear quarter windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power rear quarter windows, you should verify
that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window opening.
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Cupholders
2. Utility compartment, Coin holder
slots, Tissue box holder
3. Power point and Rear audio
controls (if equipped)
4. Rear Cupholders
5. Side storage
Use only soft cups in the
cupholder. Hard objects can
injure you in a collision.
Rear center console features (if equipped)
The rear center console
incorporates the following features:
utility compartment with tissue
box holder inside
cupholders
front storage bin
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
53
background
CLOCK
Press the right control to increase
the time displayed.
Press the left control to decrease
the time displayed.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
An auxiliary power point is located
by the passenger’s ankle near the
floor in the front console bin.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the power
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of
12 VDC/180W.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
54
background
A second auxiliary power point is
located on the rear side of the
center console. The power point is
accessible from the rear seats.
A third auxiliary power point is
located on the right rear quarter
panel. The power point is accessible
from the liftgate.
Cigar lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
POWER WINDOWS
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
1
2
3
4
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
55
background
Press and pull the switches to open
and close windows.
Push down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise; this
noise can be alleviated by:
Lowering a front window approximately two to three inches or
Open 3rd Row Power Quarter Glass, for vehicles equipped with this
option
Express down (One Touch Down, Front windows only)
Allows the driver and passenger’s
window to open fully without
holding the control down. Push the
switch completely down to the
second detent and release quickly.
The window will open fully.
Momentarily press the switch to any
position to stop the window
operation.
Express Up (One Touch Up, Front windows only)
Allows the driver and passenger’s
window to close fully without
holding the control up. Pull the
switch completely up to the second
detent and release quickly. The
window will close fully. Momentarily
press the switch to any position to
stop the window operation
Bounce-Back
When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the
window is moving upward, the window will automatically reverse
direction and move down. This is known as “bounce-back”. If the ignition
is turned OFF (without accessory delay being active) during
bounce-back, the window will move down until the bounce back position
is reached.
A
U
T
O
A
U
T
O
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
56
background
Security Override
If during a bounce-back condition, the switch is released to the neutral
position, then held in the one touch up position within two seconds after
the window reaches the bounce-back position, the window will travel
up with no bounce-back protection. If the switch is released before
the window reaches fully closed or the ignition is turned OFF (without
accessory delay being active), the window will stop. Security override
can be used if the window movement is restricted in some way, for
example, if there is ice on the window or seals.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver and front passenger to
operate the power windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver and front
passenger) press the right side of
the control. Press the left side to
restore the window controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the radio, windows, and moonroof operate for up
to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the ON to the
OFF position or until either front door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DIMMING INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
Your vehicle is equipped with an inside rear view mirror which has an
auto-dimming function. The electrochromic day/night mirror will change
from the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state
when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the mirror detects
bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically adjust (darken)
to minimize glare.
Without Navigation System
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
57
background
With Navigation System
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensor on the backside of the mirror since this may
impair proper mirror performance.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
The ignition can be in any position to adjust the power side view mirrors.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
lock mirrors in place.
Powerfold mirrors
Rotate the 4–way adjustment switch
to the center position. Press the
switch down to auto fold in and
down again to auto fold back to
design position. Powerfold the side
mirrors in carefully when driving
through a narrow space, like an
automatic car wash.
The mirrors may be moved
inward/outward manually, however,
if a mirror is moved manually, it will
need to be reset. To reset: with the switch in the center position, press
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
58
background
the switch down to fold the mirrors in and wait a short period
(8 seconds). An audible click will be heard indicating
re-synchronization. If the click is not heard, use the switch to fold the
mirrors out, then in, until the click is heard. After that, the mirrors will
operate to their normal positions until they are again moved manually.
Heated outside mirrors
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Signal indicator mirrors
When the turn signal is activated,
the lower portion of the mirror
housing will blink.
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal.
Press the top of the control to
adjust the pedals toward you.
Press the bottom of the control to adjust the pedals away from you.
POWER FOLD
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
59
background
The adjustment allows for approximately 3 inches (76 mm) of maximum
travel.
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the
pedals while the vehicle is moving.
POWER DEPLOYABLE RUNNING BOARDS (IF EQUIPPED)
Deployable running boards (DRB) automatically move when the doors
are opened to assist entering and exiting the vehicle.
Automatic power deploy:
The running boards will extend
down and out when the doors are
opened.
Automatic power stow:
The running boards will return to
the stowed position when the
doors are closed. There will be a
two second delay before the
running boards move in to the
stowed position.
Manual power deploy:
To manually operate the running boards, refer to the Message center in
this chapter.
This feature can manually set the running boards in the deployed
position for access to the roof.
When running boards are manually set in the deployed position
<OUT>, the boards will return to the stowed position and enter
automatic mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 kph).
Enable/disable:
To enable/disable the power running board feature, refer to the Message
center in this chapter.
When this feature is disabled <OFF>, the running boards will move to
the stowed position regardless of the position of the doors.
When this feature is enabled <AUTO>, the running boards will move
back to the correct positions based off of the door positions.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
60
background
Bounce-back:
If an object is in the way of the moving running board, the running
board will automatically bounce back in the reverse direction and
move to the end of travel.
Note: The running boards may operate slower in cooler temperatures. In
adverse conditions, debris such as mud, dirt, and salt may become
trapped in the running board mechanism, possibly leading to unwanted
noise. If this occurs, manually set the running boards to the deployed
position <OUT> and flush the system (in particular the front and rear
hinge arms) with a high-pressure car wash wand.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front and rear hinge assemblies,
running board motors, or the running board under body mounts to lift
the vehicle when jacking. Please utilize proper jacking points. Refer to
Changing tires in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
In extreme climates, excessive ice buildup may occur, causing
the running boards not to deploy. Be sure that the running
boards have deployed, and have finished moving before attempting to
step on them. Note: The running boards will resume normal function
once the blockage is cleared.
Turn off the running boards before jacking or placing any object
under the vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended
running board and the vehicle. A moving running board may cause
injury.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
61
background
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. The indicator
light on the
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
Depress the brake pedal.
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
62
background
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The RESUME control will
not work if the vehicle speed is not
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
Press and hold the SET - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET -
control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle
set speed in small amounts by 1
mph (1.6 km/h).
Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached and
press the SET control.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
63
background
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
Depress the brake pedal. This will
not erase your vehicle’s
previously set speed.
Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control
features.
Radio control features
Press MEDIA to select:
AM, FM1, FM2
CD (if equipped)
DVD/FES (if equipped)
SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite
Radio mode if equipped).
LINE IN (Auxiliary input jack)
In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode:
Press
SEEK to
select preset stations within the
selected radio band or press and
hold to select the next/previous
radio frequency.
In Satellite radio mode (if
equipped):
Press
SEEK to
advance through preset channels or subscribed channels.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
64
background
In CD mode:
Press
SEEK to select the next selection on the CD or
press and hold to forward or reverse the CD.
In any mode:
Press VOL + or - to adjust the
volume.
Climate control features
Press TEMP + or - to adjust
temperature.
Press FAN + or - to adjust fan
speed.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
65
background
Navigation control features (if
equipped)
Press and hold
control briefly to
use the Navigation voice command.
Press the control again to hear
previous command repeated from
the navigation system.
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
The moon roof control is located on the overhead console.
Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children
unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
When closing the moon roof, you should verify that it is free of
obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the
proximity of the moon roof opening.
Note: The moon roof will open to the “comfort” position first before
opening all the way. The “comfort” position helps to alleviate rumbling
wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully opened.
To open the moon roof: The moon
roof is equipped with a one-touch
open feature. Firmly press and
release the rear control. The moon
roof will open to the “comfort”
position. Firmly press and release
the control again to fully open. To
stop the one-touch open feature
press any control again.
To close the moon roof: Press and hold the front control until the
glass stops moving. When fully closed, the rear portion of the glass panel
will appear higher than the front portion.
To vent the moon roof: Press and hold the TILT control. The moon
roof must be in the closed position in order to move it into the
vent position. To close, press and hold the rear or front control until
the glass panel stops moving.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
66
background
The moon roof has a built-in sliding shade that can be manually opened
or closed when the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward
the front of the vehicle.
HOMELINK WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM
The HomeLink Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to
a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink.Itis
also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
67
background
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons releasing only when the
indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not repeat Step 1
to program additional hand-held
transmitters to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons. This will erase
previously programmed hand-held
transmitter signals into HomeLink.
2. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program (located on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the chosen HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons until
the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink and hand-held
transmitter buttons.
Note: Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to
replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” in this section for Canadian residents.
4. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and release the programmed
HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the
door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained HomeLink
button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 5 through
7 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
5. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
68
background
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence again, and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 2 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Steps 1 and 2
outlined in the “Programming”
section, replace Step 3 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note Step 3 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio
frequency signal.
Proceed with Step 4 in the “Programming” section.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
69
background
Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
Erasing HomeLink buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step
2inthe“Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink button, follow Step 2 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
70
background
MESSAGE CENTER
With the ignition in the ON position,
the message center, located on your
instrument cluster, displays
important vehicle information
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You may select
display features on the message center for a display of status preceded
by a brief indicator chime. The system will also notify you of potential
vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long
indicator chime.
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
Odometer/Compass
Outside air temperature (if
equipped)
Trip odometer
Distance to Empty
Average Fuel Economy
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Trip Elapsed Drive Time
Blank Screen
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
71
background
Outside air temperature (if equipped)
Press and hold the INFO button for
2 seconds to display the outside
temperature. To switch from a blank
display to the temperature display,
hold the INFO button for 2 seconds
until the temperature is seen in the
display. To switch the temperature display to compass display, hold the
INFO button again for 2 seconds until the compass heading is seen in the
display
Compass display (if equipped)
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
1. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
2. Turn ignition to the ON position.
3. Start the engine.
4. From Setup menu, select the
Update Zone function.
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
72
background
5. Press and release the RESET
until the message center displays a
selection to change the current zone
setting.
6. Press and release the RESET
control until the message center
display changes to show the current
zone setting (XX).
7. Press and release the RESET
control repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic
location is displayed on the message center. The range of zone values are
from 1 to 15 and “wraps” back to 1.
8. To exit the zone setting mode,
and to “lock in” your change:
press and release the SETUP
control or,
press INFO control to exit or,
wait 4 seconds and the zone will
be “locked in”.
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
9. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
10. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETE. It will take
up to five circles to complete calibration.
11. The compass is now calibrated.
Note: If the RESET control is pressed or 3 minutes has expired, the
display will go back to the INFO menu and will show CAL instead of the
compass heading until the compass is calibrated.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
73
background
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL
LOW
and sound a tone for one second when you have
approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If you RESET this warning
message, this display and tone will return after 10 minutes.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or liters/100
km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing 100 miles traveled by gallons of fuel used
(kilometers traveled by liters used), your figure may be different than
displayed for the following reasons:
Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for 2
Seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed control to
get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
74
background
Instantaneous fuel economy
Press INFO until the menu displays
“MPG”. This will display your fuel
economy as a Bar Graph ranging
from poor economy to excellent
economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows one or no bars
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer.
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
Reset to English (if in another
language)
System Check
Oil Life
Units (English/Metric)
Autolamp Delay (if equipped)
Easy/Entry Exit
Air Suspension (if equipped)
Autolock (if equipped)
Power Liftgate (if equipped)
Power Deployable Running Boards (if equipped)
Compass Zone (if equipped)
Compass Calibration (if equipped)
Language
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
75
background
Reset to English (if in another language)
When entering the SETUP MENU
and a non-English language has
been selected, “PRESS RESET FOR
ENGLISH” will be displayed to
change back to English.
Press and hold the RESET control to set the language choice.
Easy entry/exit
This feature automatically moves the drivers seat backwards for easy exit
from the vehicle.
1. To disable/enable the easy
entry/exit seat feature, select this
function from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the easy entry/exit ON or OFF.
Autolamp delay
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
1. To disable/enable the autolamp
delay feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to select
the new Autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or 180
seconds.
Air Suspension
Before disabling the air suspension, make sure the liftgate and liftgate
glass are in the closed position.
1. To disable/enable the air
suspension feature with the vehicle
in P (Park), select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the air suspension OFF or ON.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
76
background
Autolock (if equipped)
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
1. To disable/enable the autolock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolock ON or OFF.
Power Deployable Running Boards (if equipped)
This feature automatically deploys the side running boards for easy
entry/exit from the vehicle or for cleaning.
1. To disable/enable the power
running board feature with the
vehicle in P (Park), select this
function from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to select the running boards setting as follows:
AUTO: the running boards will automatically deploy when a door is
opened and automatically retract when the door is closed,
OUT: the running boards will remain deployed regardless of the doors
being open/closed. This setting can be used when washing the vehicle, or
accessing the roof rack. The running boards will stow and enter AUTO
mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph ( kph),
OFF: the running boards will remain IN regardless of the doors being
open/closed.
Power Liftgate (if equipped)
This feature allows users to open/close the rear liftgate at the touch of a
button.
1. To disable/enable the power
liftgate feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the power liftgate ON or OFF. If disabled, the button on the overhead
console will not respond when pressed.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
77
background
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Waiting 4 seconds or pressing the
RESET control cycles the message
center through each of the language
choices.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
3. Press and hold the RESET
control for 2 seconds to set the
language choice.
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either
an OK message or a warning message for two seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
78
background
The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the
message center is as follows:
1. OIL LIFE
2. CHARGING SYSTEM
3. WASHER FLUID LEVEL
4. DOOR STATUS
5. LIFTGATE/GLASS
6. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
7. TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM (if equipped)
8. AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (if equipped)
9. FUEL LEVEL
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
They cannot be cleared until the condition is corrected.
They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-ON cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
79
background
Warning display Status
Driver door ajar Warning can be reset. Will return if
reset and warning is cleared and set
again within the same ignition cycle.
Will return on ignition cycle.
Passenger door ajar
Rear left door ajar
Rear right door ajar
Door ajar
Liftgate/glass ajar
Check charging system
Tire pressure sensor fault (if
equipped)
Low tire pressure (if equipped)
Tire pressure monitor fault (if
equipped)
4x4 shift in progress (if
equipped)
Air suspension OFF (if
equipped)
Brake fluid level low Warning can be reset. Will NOT return
if reset and warning is cleared and set
again within the same ignition cycle.
Will return on ignition cycle.
Check park brake
Washer fluid level low
Oil change required
XXX% Oil life change soon
Check air suspension (if
equipped)
Check brake system Warning can be reset. Will return after
10 minutes. If within the 10 minutes,
the condition is cleared and set again,
it will not return until the initial 10
minutes is up. Will return on ignition
cycle.
XXX miles (km) to empty fuel
level low
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
80
background
Warning display Status
Park brake engaged Warning can be reset. Will return after
10 minutes. If within the 10 minutes,
the condition is cleared and set again,
it will return immediately. Will return
on ignition cycle.
Press reset to clear This can be reset, it will remain on
the display for 4 seconds.
Park aid <ON> OFF (if
equipped)
This cannot be reset. Pressing reset
will change the option from ON to
OFF. It appears on the display when
the vehicle is in reverse and will not
go away until the vehicle is no longer
in reverse.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the driver door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger door is not
completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear right door is not
completely closed.
DOOR AJAR. Displayed when there is an error with the door ajar system.
LIFTGATE/GLASS AJAR. Displayed when the liftgate or liftgate glass
is not completely closed.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE.Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. Displayed when the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT. Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
81
background
4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS. Displayed on 4x4 vehicles only when 4x4
High or 4x4 Auto Range is selected. For further information, refer to
AdvanceTrac with RSC stability enhancement system in the Driving
chapter.
XXX MILES TO EMPTY FUEL LEVEL LOW. Displayed as an early
reminder of a low fuel condition.
AIR SUSPENSION OFF (if equipped). Displayed when the air
suspension is off. For more information, refer to Air suspension in the
Driving chapter.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and
the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake fluid
reservoir in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
CHECK PARK BRAKE. Displayed when the park brake is engaged. If
the warning stays on after the park brake is off, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW. Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is
less than one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level. Refer to
Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
CHECK AIR SUSPENSION (if equipped). Displayed when the air
suspension system is not operating properly. If this message is displayed
while driving, pull off the road as soon as safely possible. For more
information, refer to Air suspension in the Driving chapter.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM. Displayed when the braking system is not
operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED. Displayed when the manual park brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km). If the warning stays on after the park brake is released, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
PARK AID <ON> OFF (if equipped). Displayed when the
transmission is in R (Reverse). Refer to Reverse Sensing System in this
section to enable.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED/CHANGE OIL SOON. Displayed when the
engine oil life remaining is 5 percent or less. When oil life left is between
5% and 0%, the CHANGE OIL SOON message will be displayed. When oil
life left reaches 0%, the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be
displayed.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
82
background
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
[approximately 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 180 days] perform the
following:
1. Press and release the SETUP
control to display “OIL LIFE =
XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW”.
2. Press and hold the RESET
control for 2 seconds and release.
Oil life is set to 100% and “OIL LIFE
SET TO 100%” is displayed.
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT
Do not install additional floor mats on top of the factory installed
floor mats as they may interfere with the accelerator or the
brake pedals.
Position the driver floor mat so that
the eyelet is over the pointed end of
the retention post and rotate
forward to lock in. Make sure that
the mat does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator or the
brake pedal. To remove the floor
mat, reverse the installation
procedure.
POWER LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)
The liftgate can be operated by the following:
instrument panel control button
key fob button
outside release handle
control button in the rear cargo area
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
83
background
Note: The liftgate can be reversed with a second press on a control
button or key fob and can be manually closed at any time.
The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P (Park). The chime will
beep once if conditions are not correct to start an operation. These
conditions include:
the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph (5 kph)
or the ignition is in Run and the transmission is not in Park
or the Battery Voltage is below the minimum operating voltage
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate
area before using the power liftgate control.
Keep keys out of reach of children. Do not allow children to play
near an open or moving power liftgate.
Do not open the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area with a low
ceiling. If the liftgate is raised the liftgate could be damaged against a
low ceiling.
To open the liftgate from the
Instrument panel:
Press the button once to open the
liftgate, press it again to close.
To open the liftgate with the Key fob:
Refer to Remote Entry System in the Locks and security chapter.
To open the liftgate with outside
release handle (manual
actuation):
1. To open, unlock the liftgate with
the key fob or power door unlock
control.
2. Pull and release the liftgate
handle to open the liftgate.
Note: For the best performance
allow the power system to open the
liftgate after releasing the handle. Continued upward force after
unlatching may activate the obstacle detection feature and stop the
power system.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
84
background
Note: If weight is added to the gate (bike rack, snow, etc.) the gate may
automatically start a power close event immediately after a power open.
In this mode a unique continuous chime will sound.
To close the liftgate with the
rear cargo area control button:
Press and release the control on the
left rear quarter panel to close the
liftgate. The chime will beep once if
conditions are not correct to start
an operation (i.e., the vehicle is out
of park). In a normal close, the
chime will begin just before the gate
starts to move and continue for total
of three seconds.
Press and release the control to open or reverse the liftgate.
Rear cargo area control button will not open the liftgate when the
liftgate is latched.
Warning, keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear
switch.
To manually operate the liftgate:
1. Disable the liftgate power function, refer to the Message Center in
this chapter.
2. Open and close the liftgate as you would a standard liftgate.
Note: In case of operation in extreme cold -40° F (-40° C), or on
extreme inclines, manual operation of the liftgate is suggested.
Obstacle detection
The power liftgate system is equipped with an obstacle detection feature.
If the power liftgate is closing, the system is designed to reverse to full
open when it encounters a solid obstacle. A three second chime is also
sounded when an obstacle is detected. Once the obstacle is removed, the
liftgate can be closed under power.
If the power liftgate is opening, the system is designed to stop when it
encounters a solid obstacle.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
85
background
Resetting the power liftgate:
The power liftgate may not operate under these conditions. If any of
these conditions occur, the power liftgate must be reset.
a low voltage or dead battery
disconnected battery
the liftgate is manually closed and left ajar (unlatched)
To reset the power liftgate:
1. Manually close and fully latch the liftgate.
2. Power open the liftgate by using the keyfob or instrument panel button.
Note: If the power liftgate system is turned <OFF> in the message
center, the system cannot be activated with the outside release handle or
rear cargo area control button. The system will need to be turned <ON>
to resume operation with the outside release handle or rear cargo area
control button. The Power Liftgate is still operational through the use of
the Key Fob and IP button when the Power Liftgate is turned off in the
Message center.
Liftgate ajar signal
If the liftgate or liftgate glass are not fully latched, you will receive a
“LIFTGATE or LIFTGLASS AJAR” message on the instrument panel. If
you see this message, check both the liftgate glass and liftgate door to
insure they are fully latched.
Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from
being drawn into the vehicle. If you must drive with the liftgate
open, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle.
Liftgate window
To open the liftgate window, push
the button on the left side of the
liftgate handle above the license
plate.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
86
background
MANUAL LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)
To open the liftgate, pull the liftgate
handle.
Do not open the liftgate or
liftgate glass in a garage or other
enclosed area with a low ceiling.
If the liftgate glass is raised and
the liftgate is also opened, both
liftgate and glass could be
damaged against a low ceiling.
Do not leave the liftgate or
liftgate glass open while driving. Doing so could cause serious damage
to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing carbon monoxide
to enter the vehicle.
Make sure that the liftgate door and/or window are closed to
prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This
will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must
drive with the liftgate door or window open, keep the vents open so
outside air comes into the vehicle.
CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The cargo management system
consists of a storage compartment
located in the floor of the rear cargo
area.
1. To open, lift up on the handle and
cover.
2. To close, lower the cover and
press down on the handle until the
latch clicks.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
87
background
LUGGAGE RACK
Your vehicle is equipped with a roof
rack for transporting items on the
exterior of the vehicle. The
maximum recommended load to be
carried on the roof rack is 200 lbs
(90 kg), evenly distributed. The
cross-bars can be adjusted by using
the thumbwheels at each end. Use
the tie-down loops on the
thumbwheels to secure load.
To adjust the position of the
cross-bar (if equipped):
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2. Slide the cross-bar to the desired
location.
3. Firmly retighten the thumbwheels
at each end of the cross-bar.
Be sure to check that the thumbwheels are tight each time load is added
or removed from the roof rack, and periodically while traveling.
Always ensure that the load is secure before traveling.
Ford Motor Company recommends loading the roof rack only when
equipped with (optional) cross-bars, to avoid unintended damage to the
roof panel.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
88
background
KEYS
One key operates all the locks and starts the vehicle. Always carry a
spare key with you in case of an emergency.
Your keys are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer
supplied keys, replacement keys are available through your authorized
dealer. Refer to the SecuriLock passive anti-theft system section later
in this chapter for more information.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
If the door does not unlock when the control is pressed, refer to the
Power door lock disable feature section in this chapter.
Press control to unlock all doors.
Press control to lock all doors.
Smart unlocking feature
The smart unlocking feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out
of the vehicle. With the key in any ignition position, the driver’s door will
automatically unlock if it is locked using the power lock control on the
driver’s door panel while the driver’s door is open.
Autolock
The autolock feature will lock all the doors, liftgate and liftgate window
when:
all doors are closed,
the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position,
you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
89
background
The autolock feature repeats when:
any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 3 (ON)
position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Deactivating/activating autolock
Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature enabled. There are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
Through your authorized dealer, or
Performing the power door lock control procedure, or
Performing the keyless entry key pad (if equipped) procedure, or
Performing the message center (if equipped) procedure.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure
that the anti-theft system is not armed, ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position, and all vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate window are closed.
Power door unlock/lock procedure
You must complete Steps 1-5 within
30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the
procedure needs to be repeated,
you must wait 30 seconds. Note:
All doors must be closed and
remain closed throughout the
configuration process.
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position.
2. Press the power door unlock control three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON) to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (ON) position. The horn will chirp.
6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long
chirp) if autolock was activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position. The horn will chirp
once to confirm the procedure is complete.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
90
background
Keyless entry key pad procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
2. Close all doors, the liftgate and liftgate window.
3. Enter 5–digit entry code
4. Press and hold the 3 4. While holding the 3 4pressthe7 8.
5. Release the 7 8.
6. Release the 3 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Message center procedure
For information on activating/deactivating the autolock feature using the
vehicle’s message center (if equipped), refer to Message center
information in the Driver Controls chapter.
Autounlock
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, all the doors are closed, and the
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the 1
(OFF/LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position; and
the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) or 2 (ACC) position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock feature activated. There are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
Through your authorized dealer, or
Performing the power door lock control procedure, or
Performing the keyless entry key pad (if equipped) procedure, or
Performing the message center (if equipped) procedure.
Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure
that the anti-theft system is not armed, ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position, and all vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate window are closed.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
91
background
Power door unlock/lock procedure
You must complete Steps 1-5 within
30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the
procedure needs to be repeated,
you must wait 30 seconds. Note:
All doors must be closed and
remain closed throughout the
configuration process.
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position.
2. Press the power door unlock control three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON) to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (ON) position. The horn will chirp.
6. Press the lock control, then press the unlock control. The horn will
chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice (one short and one
long chirp) if autounlock was activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position. The horn will chirp
once to confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry key pad procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
2. Close all doors, the liftgate and liftgate window.
3. Enter 5–digit entry code
4. Press and hold the 3 4. While holding the 3 4pressthe7 8
twice.
5. Release the 7 8.
6. Release the 3 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Message center procedure
For information on activating/deactivating the autounlock feature using
the vehicle’s message center (if equipped), refer to Message center
information in the Driver Controls chapter.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
92
background
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear
doors cannot be opened from the
inside. The rear doors can be
opened from the outside when the
doors are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock. Move control down
to disengage childproof locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
and liftgate and open the liftgate window without a key.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position.
The liftgate glass features operate as long as vehicle speed is less than
5 mph (8 km/h). The panic feature operates with the key in the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position.
If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are brought to the authorized
dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Unlocking the doors/liftgate
Press this control to unlock the driver’s door. The interior lamps will
illuminate with the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
93
background
4–button remote
5–button remote
Press the control a second time within three seconds to unlock all doors
and liftgate.
Locking the doors/liftgate
Press this control to lock all doors and liftgate. The park/turn signal
lamps will flash once.
To confirm all doors are closed and locked, press the control a second
time within three seconds; the park/turn signal lamps will flash once and
the horn will chirp.
4–button remote
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
94
background
5–button remote
If any of the doors or liftgate are ajar, the horn will make two quick
chirps, reminding you to properly close all doors.
Opening the liftgate window
Press the control to unlatch the liftgate window.
4–button remote
5–button remote
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
95
background
Opening the power liftgate (if equipped)
Press the control twice to fully
unlatch and open the liftgate.
Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area before using
power liftgate control.
In order to fully lower and latch the liftgate, press the control twice.
If the liftgate stops mid travel, it may have detected an obstacle, Check
to ensure the liftgate swing zone is free from obstruction and reset the
power assist by manually closing the liftgate. Normal operation can then
be resumed.
Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from
being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent passengers
and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press this control to activate the alarm.
The personal panic alarm will cycle the horn and parking lamps on/off.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
96
background
4–button remote
5–button remote
To deactivate the alarm, press the control again or turn the ignition to
the 2 (ACCESSORY) or 3 (ON) position.
Memory feature
The remote entry system can also control the memory feature.
Press the control once to unlock the driver’s door. Pressing the control
will automatically move the seat, rearview mirrors, and adjustable pedals
to the desired memory position (the memory position corresponds to the
transmitter being used).
4–button remote
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
97
background
5–button remote
Activating the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat, rearview mirror, and adjustable pedals to the
positions you desire.
2. Press the SET control on the driver’s door panel.
3. Within 5 five seconds, press one control on the remote transmitter and
then press the 1 or 2 memory seat control to which you would like to
associate with Driver 1 or Driver 2 positions.
4. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired.
Deactivating the memory seat feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
2. Within 5 five seconds, press any
control on the remote transmitter
which you would like to deactivate
and then press the SET control on
the memory seat control.
3. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
98
background
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost transmitters
If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remove it
from the vehicle’s memory, or you would like to purchase additional
remote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle:
Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your dealer for programming, or
Perform the programming procedure yourself.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
99
background
Programming remote transmitters
It is necessary to have all (maximum of six original and/or new) of
your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure. If
all remote entry transmitters are not present during the programming
procedure, the transmitters that are not present during programming will
no longer operate the vehicle. Note: Do not press the brake pedal
anytime during this sequencing, as doing so will invalidate the procedure.
To program the transmitters yourself:
Unlock all doors using the power
door lock/unlock control. Insert a
key in the ignition and turn from
the 1 (OFF/LOCK) to the 3 (ON)
position and cycle between 1
(OFF/LOCK) and 3 (ON) eight
times in rapid succession (within
10 seconds) with the eighth turn
ending in the 3 (ON) position.
The locks will cycle between
unlocked and locked to confirm that the programming mode has been
entered.
Within 20 seconds, program a remote transmitter by pressing any
button on a transmitter. The locks will cycle once to confirm that the
remote transmitter has been programmed. If more than 20 seconds
pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the programming
mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated.
Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters.
The locks will cycle once to confirm that each remote transmitter has
been programmed.
When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn
the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position or wait 20 seconds. The
doors will again lock/unlock to confirm programming has been
completed.
Illuminated entry
The lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock
the door(s).
The system automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when the ignition
is turned to the 2 (ACCESSORY) or 3 (ON) position. The dome lamp
control must not be set to the off position for the illuminated entry
system to operate.
4
3
2
1
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
100
background
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
With the keyless entry keypad, you can:
lock or unlock the vehicle doors without using the key,
release the liftgate glass,
enable or disable the autolock function, and
add or delete a 5–digit personal user code.
Your vehicle has a factory set 5–digit code that operates the keyless
entry system. You can also program your own 5–digit personal entry
code. The factory-set code is located:
on the owner’s wallet card in the glove compartment,
or at your authorized dealer.
When pressing the controls on the keyless entry keypad, press the
middle of the controls to ensure a good activation.
Anti-scan feature
If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will
flash during this time. Note: Pressing 7 8 and the 9 0 simultaneously
during this one minute period will still lock the vehicle.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after one minute of keypad inactivity.
Programming your own personal entry code
To program your own code:
1. Enter the factory set code (keypad will illuminate when pressed).
2. Press the 1 2 control within five seconds of Step 1.
3. Enter your personal 5–digit code.
Enter each digit within five seconds
of previous one.
4. After the code is entered, the
locks will cycle, confirming that the
new code has been set.
Do not set a code that includes five of the same number or presents
them in sequential order. Thieves can easily figure out these types of
codes.
Your personal code does not replace the permanent code that your
authorized dealer gave you. You can use either code to unlock your
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
101
background
vehicle. If a second personal code is entered, the module will erase the
first personal code in favor of the new code.
If you wish to erase your personal code, use the following instructions:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Press the 1 2 control and release.
The system will now only respond to the factory set code.
Unlocking and locking the doors, liftgate and liftgate window using
keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate.
To unlock all doors and liftgate, press the 3 4 control within five
seconds.
To open the liftgate window, press the 5 6 control within five
seconds.
To lock all doors, liftgate and liftgate window, press the 7 8 and
the 9 0 at the same time. Note: The driver’s door must be closed. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first.
SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used.
The SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Theft indicator
The theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will
flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is
functioning as a theft deterrent.
When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for
service.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
102
background
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
after switching the ignition to the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 3 (ON) position with a coded key disarms
the vehicle.
Key information
Your vehicle is supplied with two coded keys. Only a coded key will
start your vehicle. Spare coded keys can be purchased from your
authorized dealer. Your authorized dealer can program your key or you
can “do it yourself.” Refer to the Programming spare keys section in
this chapter.
The following items may prevent the vehicle from starting:
Large metallic objects
Electronic devices on the key chain that can be used to purchase
gasoline or similar items
A second key on the same key ring as the coded key
If any of these items are present, you need to keep these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the engine. These objects and
devices cannot damage the coded key, but can cause a momentary “no
start” condition if they are too close to the key during engine start. If a
problem occurs, turn ignition to the OFF position and restart the engine
with all other objects on the key ring held away from the ignition key.
Check to make sure the coded key is an approved Lincoln coded key.
If your keys are lost or stolen you will need to do the following:
Use your spare key to start the vehicle, or
Have your vehicle towed to a authorized dealer or a locksmith. The
key codes will need to be erased from your vehicle and new key codes
will need to be re-coded.
4
3
2
1
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
103
background
Replacing coded keys can be very costly and you may want to store an
extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to prevent
an unforeseen inconvenience.
The correct coded key must be used for your vehicle. The use of the
wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no start” condition.
If an unprogrammed key is used in the ignition it will cause a “no
start” condition.
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded
key(s) programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from
the 1 (OFF/LOCK) to the 3 (ON)
position [maintain ignition in 3 (ON)
for at least three seconds, but no
more than ten seconds].
2. Turn ignition from 3 (ON) back to
the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position in order
to remove the first coded key from
the ignition.
3. Within ten seconds of removing the first coded key, insert the second
previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition
from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) to the 3 (ON) position [maintain ignition in 3
(ON) for at least three seconds but no more than ten seconds].
4. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON) back to 1 (OFF/LOCK) position in
order to remove the second coded key from the ignition.
5. Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the
ignition from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) to the 3 (ON) position [maintain
ignition in 3 (ON) for at least three seconds, but no more than ten
seconds]. This step will program your new key to a coded key.
4
3
2
1
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
104
background
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this
procedure from Step 1.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1
through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer
to have the new spare key(s) programmed.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
105
background
SEATING
Front row adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle’s seats are equipped with two-way adjustable head
restraints. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head
motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head
restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your
head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following
illustration to raise and lower the head restraints.
Lift the head restraint to raise the
height.
Push control to lower head restraint.
Using the power lumbar support
The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Press the forward side of the control
for additional support.
Press the rear side of the control to
reduce support.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
106
background
Adjusting the front power seat
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring
people in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to raise or lower the
front portion of the seat cushion.
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
107
background
Press the switch in the direction of
the arrows to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Press the control to recline the
seatback forward or rearward.
Note: On vehicles with memory seats, to prevent damage to the seat,
the power seats are designed to set a stopping position just short of the
end of the seat track. If the seat encounters an object while moving
forward or backward, a new stopping position will be set. To reset the
seat to its normal stopping position:
After encountering the new stopping position, press the power seat
control again to override.
Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the seat
track.
Continue pressing the control for approximately 2 seconds. You will
feel the seat bounce back slightly.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
108
background
Memory seats/power mirrors/adjustable pedals (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat, power
mirrors, and adjustable pedals to
two programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the outboard side of the seat
cushion.
To program position 1, move the
driver seat, mirrors and pedals (if
equipped) to the desired position
using the associated controls. Press the SET control. Within 5 seconds
of pressing the SET control, press control 1.
To program position 2, repeat the previous procedure using control 2.
A position can be recalled:
in any gearshift position if the ignition is not in the RUN position.
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the ignition is in the RUN position.
A memory seat position may be programmed at any time.
The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter UNLOCK control (if the transmitter is programmed to
a memory position) or, when you enter a valid personal entry code that
is programmed to a memory position.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter and for
more information on how to use the keypad, refer to Remote entry
system in the Locks and Security chapter.
Heated seats and climate controlled seats (if equipped) operation
The heated seats and the cooled seats will only function when the
ignition is in RUN.
The controls for the climate controlled seats are located on the dual
electronic automatic temperature control (DEATC) system. Refer to
Climate controls for more information.
If the vehicle falls below 350 RPMs while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
109
background
Climate controlled seats air filter replacement (if equipped)
The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for
more information.
There is a filter located under
each front seat.
The filter can be accessed from the first row seat. Move the front
seats all the way back and up to ease access.
To remove an air filter:
Remove key from ignition.
Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter and rotate toward the
front of the vehicle once tabs are
released.
Remove filter.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
110
background
To install a filter:
First, position the filter in it’s
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in
the housing. Then push in on the
center of the outside edge of the
filter and rotate up into the
housing until it clips into position.
REAR SEATS
Folding down the 2nd row 40% seat system
Use caution when folding the seatback to the flat back position
as the system will move forward when you lift the release
handle.
Ensure that the head restraint is in the down position and no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the
second row seats before folding them down.
Move the front passenger seat forward so that the second row seat
headrest clears the front seat.
For assistance, refer to the label located on the side of the seat cushion.
1. Lower the head restraints by
pulling on the strap.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
111
background
2. Locate handle on the side of the
seat cushion by the door.
3. Pull up on the handle and push
the seatback forward toward the
front of the vehicle.
To return the seat to the upright position:
1. Lift the seatback toward the rear
of the vehicle.
2. Rotate the seatback until you
hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
3. Lift up on the head restraint until
it locks into its original position.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
112
background
Placing the 2nd row outboard 40% seats in cargo mode
Use caution when folding the seatback to the flat back position
as the system will move forward when you lift the release
handle.
The 2nd row seats can be placed in a kneel down load floor position to
allow more cargo space.
To place the seats in the cargo mode:
1. Fold down the 2nd row seat.
2. Pull the cargo mode lever up to
release the seat into a kneel down
load floor position. A moderate force
may be required to move the seat
forward and down.
Returning to the upright position from full lowered load floor
position
The seatback cannot be returned to the upright position until the seat is
returned from the kneel down position. To return the seat to the upright
position:
1. Push the seat rearward until the
latch is engaged.
2. Return the seatback to the
upright position.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
113
background
Adjusting the 2nd row outboard 40% seat for E-Z Entry
The E-Z entry seat allows for easier entry and exit to and from the 3rd
row seat.
To enter the 3rd row seat:
1. Fold down the 2nd row seat and release the handle.
2. Pull the handle up again until the
seat releases from the floor.
3. Push the seat upward and fold it
away from the third row.
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury
during a sudden stop.
To return the seat to a seating position:
1. Push the seat down and latch to
the floor with a moderate amount of
effort and speed.
2. Make sure the seat is latched to
the floor.
3. Bring the seat back to an upright
position. The seatback should lock
into position.
Note: If the seat back will not
return to the upright position,
tumble the seat again and re-latch it to the floor. Be sure that cargo or
other objects are not trapped underneath the seatback.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
114
background
Exiting the 3rd row
1. Pull the strap located at the
bottom outboard of the seat back to
release the seat from the floor, and
rotate the seat up towards the front
seat.
2. Follow the directions above to
return the seat from the E-Z entry
and to the upright position.
Reclining the 2nd row outboard 40% seatback
Locate the release handle on the
outboard side of the seat cushion
and lift gently to allow the seatback
to be adjusted to the desired
location.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Folding the 2nd row center 20% seat system (if equipped)
1. Locate the release handle located
in the upper left seat back, and pull
the handle to release the folding
seat latch.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
115
background
To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts, ensure
that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to
the load floor position.
2. With the latch released the
seatback can be lowered into the
load floor position.
3. To return the seat to the upright
position, lift the seatback until the
latch is fully engaged.
Before returning the
seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or
any objects are not trapped
underneath the seatback. After
returning the seatback to its
original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of
a sudden stop or collision.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
116
background
Adjusting the 2nd row center 20% seat (if equipped)
Lift the handle to move the seat
forward or backward.
Note: This seat can be moved forward to keep a child in a child
restraint close to the front seat occupants. The seat should be
moved to the full rearward position when it is occupied by older
children or adults.
3rd row seats
Ensure that no objects such as books, purses or briefcases are on the
floor in front of the third row seats or on the seat cushion before
lowering them. Ensure that the head restraints are lowered. Ensure that
the second row seats are not reclined.
Folding down the 3rd row seats to the load floor
To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts, ensure
that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to
the load floor position.
Before folding the third row seats,
fold the head restraints down by
pulling on the strap located at the
bottom of the restraint.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
117
background
Pull up on the handle located
behind the seatback while pushing
the seatback forward and down into
the seat cushion.
To return the seatback to its original position lift the seatback until it
latches into place.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Third row power folding seat (if equipped)
Note: Be sure that the head
restraints are folded down before
powering the 3rd row seat down.
The control buttons are located on
the right-hand rear quarter trim
panel (accessible from the liftgate
area).
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
118
background
Push the bottom portion of the
control button to lower the desired
seatback.
Push the top of the control button
to return the seatback to its original
position.
The power fold down seats will operate for 30 minutes after the
ignition switch is in Off. The transmission must be in P (park),
and the liftgate, or liftgate glass must be open. Similar to the
Battery Saver feature, the power 3rd row seat will be disabled 30
minutes after turning the vehicle off. If the power 3rd row seat is
disabled after 30 minutes, the seat can be enabled by opening any
door, pressing the unlock key on the key fob, pressing any keyless
keypad button, or turning the ignition key.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
119
background
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,
and safety belt usage sensors.
Driver’s seat position sensor.
Front crash severity sensor.
Restraints Control Module (RCM).
Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,
side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
120
background
allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety restraints section in this chapter.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers when the
vehicle is equipped with the Safety Canopy system. This helps increase
the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt
pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient
severity, together with the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Safety restraints section in
this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not
required.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
121
background
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, and the driver
seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints
warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is
indicated by one or more of the following:
The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
The warning light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is
turned on.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal Safety
System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the event of a collision.
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the back
seat where they can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
122
background
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
Front and rear seats
2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
123
background
Front and rear seats
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts
except for the front row center lap belt (if equipped).
Front center lap belt
To fasten the front center lap belt,
insert the tongue into the center
buckle until you hear a snap and
feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle. Pull
on the webbing to tighten the belt.
All combination lap/shoulder belts, other than the driver’s belt, have two
modes:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is pre-locked. The belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
124
background
When to use the automatic locking mode
Anytime a child safety seat (except a booster) is installed in the
vehicle. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for
children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire belt
is pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and return to the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, the combination lap and shoulder belt
system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the “automatic locking retractor”
feature for child seats is still functioning properly, in addition to other
checks for proper safety belt system function.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
125
background
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if
the safety belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other safety belt function is not operating properly. In addition, all
safety belts should be checked for proper function. Failure to replace
the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
right front passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner removes some slack from the safety belt
system at the start of a crash. The safety belt pretensioner uses the
same crash sensor system as the front airbags and Safety Canopy
system. When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, the lap and shoulder
belt are tightened.
When the Safety Canopy system and/or the front airbags are activated,
the safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger
seating positions will be activated when the respective seatbelt is
properly buckled.
The driver and the right front passenger safety belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags or Safety Canopy and safety belt
pretensioners.
Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter.
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments for the driver and right
front passenger. Adjust the height of
the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To lower the shoulder belt height,
squeeze the side release buttons
with your thumb and finger and
slide the height adjuster down. To
raise the height of the shoulder belt,
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
126
background
squeeze the side release buttons and slide the height adjuster up. Pull
down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Second row comfort guide
The second row outboard
lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
belt comfort guide. This guide is
attached to the quarter trim panel
and is used to adjust the comfort of
the shoulder belt for smaller
occupants in the outboard second
row seats.
To adjust the comfort guide:
1. Slip the shoulder belt into the
belt guide. (The portion of the belt
between the latch tongue and the
D-ring, not the portion where the
belt exits from the quarter trim
panel.)
2. Slide the guide up or down along
the webbing so that the belt is
centered on the occupant’s shoulder.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
127
background
Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there isa8inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters, shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should
be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
128
background
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
BeltMinder
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
When the BeltMinder feature is activated, the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until the safety
belts are buckled.
The BeltMinder feature uses two different warning chimes. During the
first minute of activation, the warning chime will sound once every
second. The remaining warning chimes will sound twice every second
while the system is activated.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
129
background
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled approximately 5
seconds after the safety belt
warning light has turned off...
The BeltMinder feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately 5 minutes or until
safety belt is buckled.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the safety belt
indicator light is illuminated
and the safety belt warning
chime is sounding...
The BeltMinder feature will not
activate.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The BeltMinder feature will not
activate.
The purpose of the BeltMinder is to remind occasional wearers to wear
safety belts all of the time.
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given... Consider...
“Crashes are rare events” 36 700 crashes occur every day.
The more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1in4ofuswillbe
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3of4fatal crashes occur within
25 miles of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
130
background
Reasons given... Consider...
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident.
BeltMinder reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
“Safety belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“I have an airbag” Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate
into the buckle to avoid the BeltMinder chime. To do so may
adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag system
One time disable
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle
only.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
131
background
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature (if equipped)
Read Steps1-4thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The driver BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by
performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
The parking brake is set
The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
The ignition switch is in the OFF position
The driver safety belt is unbuckled
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the
BeltMinder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately
1 minute)
Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. At a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times,
ending in the unbuckled state. (Step 3 must be completed within
50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off.)
After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
This will disable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
This will enable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with the
light off, then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing 4 times
per second for 3 seconds again.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
132
background
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
133
background
Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying
airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the airbag module. Placing
objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your authorized
dealer.
The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to
an occupant in the center front seating position.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the
risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
134
background
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates airbag
inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. The driver and passenger airbags are designed to inflate
in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
135
background
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again
and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
The SRS consists of:
driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags),
one or more impact and safing sensors and diagnostic monitor (RCM),
a readiness light and tone
the electrical wiring which connects the components.
The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits
and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
136
background
impact sensors, the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the
airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors).
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness section
in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front
seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in
the event of a collision.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag SRS, its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag. See your
authorized dealer.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
137
background
All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts
even when an airbag SRS is provided.
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
with an inflator concealed behind
the outboard bolster of the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
A special seat cover designed to
allow airbag deployment.
The same warning light,
electronic control and diagnostic
unit as used for the front airbags.
Crash sensors located on the
front doors and C pillars (one
sensor on each pillar on each side
of the vehicle).
Side airbags, in combination with
safety belts, can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a
significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. If the front passenger sensing system
detects an empty seat, the front passenger seat-mounted side airbag will
be deactivated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door
panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
138
background
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the side airbag has
deployed, the airbag will
not function again. The side
airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and
serviced by an authorized
dealer . If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Safety Canopy system
Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that may come into contact with a
deploying Safety Canopy. Failure
to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury
in the event of a collision.
Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety Canopy could
injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Safety Canopy
system, its fuses, the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or the headliner on
a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy. See your authorized dealer.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
139
background
All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety
Canopy system is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy.
How does the Safety Canopy system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy).
The Safety Canopy system
consists of the following:
An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
A headliner designed to flex open above the side doors to allow Safety
Canopy deployment.
The same readiness airbag light, electronic control and diagnostic unit
as used for the front airbags.
Two crash sensors mounted in the front doors (one on each side of
the vehicle).
Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side of the vehicle).
Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
140
background
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The Safety Canopy system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to
close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy inflation or when
a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, along the entire side of the vehicle. In certain lateral collisions
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy system will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further
enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or
rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions,
unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover.
Several Safety Canopy system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
If the Safety Canopy
system has deployed, the
Safety Canopy will not
function again unless replaced.
The Safety Canopy system
(including the A, B, C, and D
pillar trim) must be inspected
and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the Safety Canopy is
not replaced, the unrepaired area
will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
141
background
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
142
background
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat.
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury in a crash.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
143
background
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
144
background
Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
145
background
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt
does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
146
background
When installing a child safety seat:
Review and follow the information
presented in the airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
Place seat back in upright position.
Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode section in this chapter.
The second row center seat can be moved forward to keep a child in a
child restraint close to the front seat occupants. The seat should be
moved to the full rearward position when it is occupied by older
children or adults.
LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to
48 pounds (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used
for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to
provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg)
using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this
chapter.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
147
background
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use
a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
148
background
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
149
background
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2
through 9.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Installing child safety seats in the center front seating position
(if equipped)
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the rear
seats and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
It is safer to install child safety seats in seating positions that
have child seat anchors. The front seat has no tether anchor nor
does it have LATCH anchors.
1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt, hold the tongue so that its
bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the
tongue up the webbing.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
150
background
2. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position.
3. Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating
position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue.
5. Push down on the child seat with your knee while pulling on the loose
end of the lap belt webbing to tighten the belt.
6. Before placing the child into the child seat, forcibly move the child
seat from side to side and forward to make sure that the seat is held
securely. If the child seat moves excessively, repeat Steps 5 through 6, or
properly install the child seat in a different position.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
Some of the rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
In the third row center seating position, the tether anchor is a loop at
the bottom of the seatback.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Second row bench seat
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
151
background
Second row bucket seats
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
Second row seating positions
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Locate the tether anchor at the bottom back of the seat.
outboard seating positions
center seating position (if
equipped)
3. Route the child safety seat tether strap under the head restraint
(outboard seats) and over the back of the seat.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
152
background
4. Grasp the tether strap and
position it to the seat frame.
5. Rotate the tether strap, and clip
the tether strap to the anchor on
the seat frame.
6. Rotate the tether strap clip.
7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Third row seating position
1. Position the child safety seat on the center of the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
153
background
3. Locate the anchor webbing loop for the seating position.
You may need to pull back the
top of the hinged panel along the
bottom of the seat back to access
the tether anchor.
4. Clip the tether strap through the
anchor loop as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a collision.
5. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this
chapter.
6. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
154
background
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach
the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also
be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat symbol:
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
155
background
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the second row seat
between the cushion and seat back.
The LATCH anchors are below the
locator symbols on the seat back.
The locator symbols are on round plastic buttons on the center seat and
on rectangular tags on the outboard seats.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to move the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
156
background
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
Keep tires properly inflated;
Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear seat belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints to
minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to
use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
157
background
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow
you to select different drive modes
as necessary. Information on
transfer case operation and shifting
procedures can be found in the
Driving chapter. Information on
transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD
vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better
than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
Higher to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
Shorter to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
158
background
Narrower to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
159
background
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
160
background
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
161
background
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
162
background
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire
Information section for description): Store and maintain at 60psi
(4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at the
higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
163
background
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
164
background
Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
165
background
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size
and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
edge of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these
labels then you should consult your Ford dealer. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized
dealer.
When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not
exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the
tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet away from the tire wheel assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. away from the tire wheel
assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
166
background
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
Observe posted speed limits
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
Avoid potholes and objects on the road
Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
167
background
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
168
background
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
169
background
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
170
background
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
171
background
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a
total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
172
background
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
173
background
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
174
background
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
175
background
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following
chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System:
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
Possible cause Customer Action Required
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Check your tire pressure to
ensure tires are properly
inflated; refer to Inflating
your tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to
the manufacturer’s
recommended inflation
pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for
at least two minutes over 20
mph (32 km/h) before the light
will turn OFF.
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on
the vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
on how the system functions,
refer to When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this
section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the light
remains ON, have the system
inspected by your authorized
dealer.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
176
background
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
Possible cause Customer Action Required
Flashing Warning
Light
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
of how the system functions
under these conditions, refer to
When your temporary spare
tire is installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the TPMS
warning light is still ON, have
the system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6° C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check air pressure in the road tires. If
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
177
background
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
Use only cable type chains or chains offered by Ford as an accessory
or equivalent. Other conventional link type chains may contact and
cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house and/or body.
Do not install chains on the front wheels. Chains on the front wheels
may interfere with suspension components.
Chains are not recommended for use on the P275/55R20 tire.
Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire chains on your vehicle.
VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
178
background
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
179
background
Example only:
Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
180
background
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle
weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling
or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
181
background
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and
passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875
lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
182
background
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400
(5 x 220) (5 x 30) = 1400 1100 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg
(5 x 99 kg) (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 495 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
183
background
A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100
lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220)
(12 x 100) = 1400 440 1200 = 240 lb. No, you do not have
enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg (2 x 99 kg) (12 x 45 kg) = 635
198 540 = —103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at
least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags,
then the load calculation would be:
1400 (2 x 220) (9 x 100) = 1400 440 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg (2 x 99 kg)
(9 x 45 kg) = 635 198 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
the Driving chapter of this owner guide.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, transmission,
axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to maximize vehicle
performance, be sure to use the proper equipment while towing.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
184
background
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing:
Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the
severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide.
Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
500 miles (800 km). Additionally, during the first 500 miles (800 km)
that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 70 mph (112 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle.
Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
Trailer towing (standard equipment):
Your vehicle is equipped with a integrated trailer hitch and a Class I
(4-pin) trailer electrical connector. The 4-pin connector supplies power
to tail lamps, stop lamps, and turn lamps. See the trailer towing chart for
the trailer towing weight recommendation.
Trailer towing (optionally equipped trailer tow package):
The optional trailer tow package includes heavy duty trailer tow wiring.
Both a Class I (4-pin) and IV (7-pin) trailer electrical connector are
provided. Under the instrument panel a electrical connector is provided
for a customer supplied aftermarket electronic brake controller. For
installing a customer supplied electronic brake controller, a electrical
jumper harness and trailer tow electrical instructions are included with
the optional trailer tow package.
The kit containing a electrical jumper and trailer tow electrical
instructions may be purchased from any authorized dealer (Part number
4L1Z-14A348-AA)
Note: Before towing a trailer, make sure the trailer brakes (if equipped)
and lamps are properly connected and functional. Electronic trailer
brakes (if equipped) refer to the instructions provided by the
aftermarket electronic brake controller manufacture for determining
trailer brake functionality.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
185
background
Engine
Rear axle
ratio
Maximum GCWR
- lb. (kg)
Trailer weight
range (0 -
maximum) - lb.
(kg)
4x2
5.4L with
standard
trailer tow
package
All 12100 (5489) 0–6000 (0–2721)
5.4L with
optional trailer
tow package
All 15000 (6804) 0–8950 (0–4059)
4x4
5.4L with
standard
trailer tow
package
All 12300 (5579) 0–6000 (0–2721)
5.4L with
optional trailer
tow package
All 15000 (6804) 0–8750 (0–3968)
Note: For vehicles not equipped with the optional trailer tow package,
the maximum frontal area of trailer should not exceed the frontal area
of the vehicle.
Note: For vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package, the
maximum frontal area of trailer should not exceed 60 square feet (5.6
square meters).
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer
to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue
load of your loaded trailer when figuring the total weight.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
186
background
Integrated hitch rating
The standard integrated hitch has two ratings depending on mode of
operation:
Weight carrying - requires a draw bar and hitch ball. The draw bar
supports all the vertical tongue load of the trailer.
Weight distributing - requires an aftermarket weight distributing
system which includes draw bar, hitch ball, spring bars and snap-up
brackets. The vertical tongue load of the trailer is distributed between
the truck and the trailer by this system.
Mode Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight - lb. (kg)
Maximum Tongue
Weight - lb. (kg)
Weight
carrying
6000 (2721) 600 (272)
Weight
distributing
8950 (4059) 895 (405)
These are hitch ratings only; actual vehicle ratings are dependent on
engine, transmission and axle combinations.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum tongue weight exceeds the
limit of the towing system and could result in vehicle structural
damage, loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
Trailer hitch cover
Your vehicle is equipped with a removable trailer hitch trim cover. To
remove the trim cover:
1. Loosen the two
1
4
-turn fasteners
in the bottom of the cover by
turning them counterclockwise. Pull
the cover downward to remove it;
the fasteners will remain attached to
the cover.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
187
background
2. To reinstall the cover, insert the
four plastic tabs on top of the cover
into the corresponding slots, as
shown in the illustration and push
the cover up into the bumper trim.
3. Hold the cover against the bumper trim and reinstall the two
1
4
-turn
fasteners by turning them clockwise.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Weight distributing hitch
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition in the
ON position and all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand (without
passengers) for several minutes so that it can level.
2. Turn the air suspension (if equipped) control to OFF.
3. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
4. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that
the front bumper height is within a
1
2
(13 mm) of the reference point.
After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher than in
Step 3.
5. Turn the air suspension (if equipped) control to ON.
Note: Adjusting a weight distributing hitch so the rear bumper of the
vehicle is higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the
weight distributing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
188
background
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and
equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) during the first
500 miles (800 km) of towing a trailer, and don’t make full throttle
starts.
Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Understanding the positions of the 6–speed automatic
transmission section in this chapter.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
189
background
Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with RSC, you may
experience AdvanceTrac with RSC activations during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer; this is normal. Cornering at a
slower speed while towing will reduce the tendency of the AdvanceTrac
stability enhancement system to activate.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
for more information.
Trailer towing tips
Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight.
If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
190
background
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
causing internal damage to the components.
affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND)
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motorhome. Follow these guidelines if you have the need for
recreational towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground.
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not
damaged.
2WD vehicles (with automatic transmissions):
Place the transmission in N (Neutral)
Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h)
Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km)
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must
be exceeded, the drive shaft will have to be removed before the vehicle
is towed.
Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified
technician at an authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal
transmission components.
Vehicles equipped with Control Trac four-wheel drive system:
Vehicles equipped with the Control Trac four-wheel drive system cannot
be towed with any wheels on the ground. See your authorized dealer if
you must flat-tow a vehicle equipped with the Control Trac four-wheel
drive system.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
191
background
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. OFF/LOCK, locks the steering
wheel, automatic transmission
gearshift lever and allows key
removal.
2. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
3. ON, all electrical circuits
operational. Warning lights
illuminated. Key position when driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key once the engine starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
192
background
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle
for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
3. Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
193
background
4. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
5. Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key once the engine
starts.
1. Turn the key to 4 (START)
without pressing the accelerator
pedal and release once the engine
starts. The key will return to 3
(ON).
2. When the engine starts, release
the key.
3. After idling for a few seconds,
apply the brake, shift into gear and
drive.
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
194
background
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
If your vehicle is factory-equipped
with an engine block heater, a
rubber cap/plug assembly will be
visibly attached to the grille on the
front of the vehicle. For factory
equipped, this assembly is loose
shipped in-vehicle for authorized
dealer installation. If not
factory-equipped, the engine block
heater can be purchased through
authorized dealer accessories.
Replacement rubber caps are
available through the authorized
dealer, 3L1Z-6E088-AA.
Use of an engine block heater is
strongly recommended if you live in
a region where temperatures reach -10°F (-23°C) or below. For best
results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle
(the heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle). To
plug the heater in, remove the cap from the plug and insert the plug into
a 110 volt grounded outlet. Be sure to re-attach the cap onto the plug
when the heater is not in use.
Note: Make sure you disconnect the cap from the plug when opening
the hood.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
195
background
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
BRAKES
Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled
maintenance information for scheduled maintenance.
Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a
performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal
operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent
squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are
usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning;
however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be
aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture,
road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or
“continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings
may be worn-out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear.
Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they may overheat
and become less effective.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
On ABS-equipped vehicles, a noise from the hydraulic pump motor and
pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal
pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic conditions or on
loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper
functioning of the vehicle’s anti-lock brake system. The ABS performs a
self-check after you start the engine and begin to drive away. A brief
mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal. If a
malfunction is found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
P !
BRAKE
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
196
background
The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake
applications and compensates for this tendency. The wheels are
prevented from locking even when the brakes are firmly applied.
Using ABS
In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four-wheel
ABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The four wheel
ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain steering
control of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient space, will
enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled
stop.
The anti-lock system does not always reduce stopping distance.
Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you to stop.
We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking
technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS warning lamp in the
instrument cluster momentarily
illuminates when the ignition is
turned on. If the light does not
illuminate momentarily at start up,
remains on or continues to flash, the ABS needs to be serviced.
With the ABS light on, the anti-lock
brake system is disabled and normal
braking is still effective unless the
brake warning light also remains
illuminated with parking brake
released. (If your brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle
serviced immediately.)
ABS
P !
BRAKE
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
197
background
Parking brake with auto-release (if equipped)
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the
parking brake is released.
Always set the parking
brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely
latched in P (Park).
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
Your vehicle has an automatic parking brake release. To release the
parking brake:
1. Turn the ignition to the ON position.
2. Press the brake pedal.
3. Move the gearshift out of the P (Park) position (the parking brake will
release automatically when you shift into reverse). The brake pedal must
remain pressed while the gearshift is moved.
P !
BRAKE
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
198
background
If the parking brake fails to release
after completing this procedure, use
the manual parking brake release
lever.
Pull the release lever to release the
brake. Driving with the parking
brake on will cause the brakes to
wear out quickly and reduce fuel
economy.
ADVANCETRAC WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL (RSC)
STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The AdvanceTrac with RSC system provides stability enhancement
features such as Roll Stability Control (RSC), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) and Traction Control (TCS) for certain driving situations.
The system includes an AdvanceTrac with RSC on/off button, and a
“sliding car” icon in the instrument cluster.
Some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake pedal when the
AdvanceTrac with RSC performs a system self-check. During
AdvanceTrac with RSC operation you may experience the following:
A rumble, grunting, or grinding noise after startup and when driving
off
A slight deceleration of the vehicle
The AdvanceTrac with RSC indicator light will flash when the system
is activated.
If your foot is on the brake pedal, you will feel a vibration in the
pedal.
If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal will move to apply higher brake forces. You may also hear
a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe
condition.
Traction Control
Traction Control helps your vehicle maintain traction, when driving on
slippery and/or hilly road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel
spin. Excessive wheel spin is controlled by momentarily reducing engine
power and/or applying the anti-lock brakes. Traction Control is a driver
aid that helps your vehicle.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
199
background
If your vehicle should become stuck in deep snow or mud, try switching
the AdvanceTrac with RSC system off by pressing the AdvanceTrac with
RSC button momentarily. This will allow your tires to “dig” for traction.
If the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is activated excessively in a short
period of time, the brake portion of the system will disable to allow the
brakes to cool down. In this situation, Traction Control will use only
engine power reduction to help control the wheels from over-spinning.
When the brakes have cooled down, the system will again function
normally. Anti-lock braking, RSC and ESC are not affected by this
condition and will function normally during the cool-down period.
If the vehicle is stuck in snow or mud or when driving in deep sand,
switching off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system may be beneficial so the
wheels are allowed to spin. If your vehicle seems to lose engine power
while driving in deep sand or very deep snow, switching off the
AdvanceTrac with RSC stability enhancement feature will restore full
engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle.
During Traction Control events the “sliding car” icon in the instrument
cluster will flash momentarily.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) with RSC system may enhance
your vehicle’s stability during adverse maneuvers.
The AdvanceTrac with RSC system helps the driver maintain steering
control. AdvanceTrac with RSC will attempt to correct the vehicle
motion by applying brake force at individual tires and, if necessary, by
reducing engine power.
During Electronic Stability Control events the “sliding car” icon in the
instrument cluster will flash momentarily.
Driving maneuvers which may activate AdvanceTrac with RSC system
include:
Taking a turn too fast.
Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle.
Driving over a patch of ice.
Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road.
Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa.
Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
200
background
Driving on slick surfaces.
Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.)
Roll Stability Control (RSC)
The RSC system works in conjunction with the AdvanceTrac system to
help maintain roll stability of the vehicle during aggressive maneuvers by
applying brake force to one or more wheels.
During Roll Stability Control (RSC) events the “sliding car” icon in the
instrument cluster will flash momentarily.
Driving conditions that may activate AdvanceTrac with RSC include:
Emergency lane-change
Taking a turn too fast
Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
AdvanceTrac with RSC button and icon functionality
The AdvanceTrac with RSC system automatically turns on each time the
engine is started, even if it was turned off when the engine was last shut
down. The “sliding car” icon which is located with the warning lights in the
instrument cluster will illuminate during bulb check at initial start-up and
then go off. This tells you that the system is normal and active. All
functions of the AdvanceTrac with RSC (RSC, ESC, Engine Traction
Control, and Brake Traction Control) will be activated at start up. When
the system is left active, the “sliding car” icon will flash only when any of
the components of the system are affecting the vehicle’s performance,
otherwise the light will remain off. Consequently, the “sliding car” icon will
not be illuminated during most of your normal driving.
The AdvanceTrac with RSC button,
located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, allows the driver
to control certain features of the
AdvanceTrac with RSC system
below 25 mph (40 km/h). If the
vehicle is below 25 mph (40 km/h), momentarily pressing the
AdvanceTrac with RSC button will disable RSC, ESC and Engine
Traction Control and steadily illuminate the “sliding car” icon. Pressing
and holding the AdvanceTrac with RSC button for more than five
seconds will further disable the brake portion of the Traction Control
feature and the “sliding car” icon will flash momentarily and then
illuminate steady.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
201
background
If the vehicle is above 25 mph (40 km/h), momentarily pressing the
AdvanceTrac with RSC button will steadily illuminate the “sliding car”
icon, however, the AdvanceTrac with RSC system will remain enabled
until the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph. If the vehicle speed
decreases below 25 mph (40 km/h), the system will become deactivated,
but if the vehicle speed subsequently increases to above 25 mph (40
km/h), the system will again become active. In general, the system will
be active at all times the vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
In R (Reverse), ABS and the Traction Control feature will continue to
function, however ESC and RSC are disabled.
All these conditions are normal during AdvanceTrac with RSC
operation. Refer to the following table.
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Button
functions
“Sliding
car” icon
RSC ESC
Engine
Traction
Control
Brake
Traction
Control
Default at
start-up
Illuminated
during bulb
check
Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Button
pressed
momentarily
Illuminated
solid
Disabled
below 25
mph (40
km/h)
Disabled
below 25
mph (40
km/h)
Disabled
below 25
mph (40
km/h)
Enabled
Button
pressed and
held more
than five
seconds
Flashes
then
illuminated
solid
Disabled
below 25
mph (40
km/h)
Disabled
below 25
mph (40
km/h)
Disabled
below 25
mph (40
km/h)
Disabled
below 25
mph (40
km/h)
Do not alter or modify your vehicle’s suspension or steering; the
resulting changes to the vehicle’s handling can adversely affect
the AdvanceTrac with RSC system.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
202
background
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of a AdvanceTrac with
RSC event is an indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
If a failure is detected in the AdvanceTrac with RSC system, and the
AdvanceTrac with RSC button has not been pushed, the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster will stay on. If the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster remains on while the engine is
running, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy
from the engine to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle.
To help prevent damage to the power steering pump:
Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left
for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
Do not operate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level
below the MIN mark on the reservoir.
Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)
Uneven vehicle loading
High crown in center of road
High crosswinds
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
203
background
Wheels out of alignment
Loose or worn suspension components
Variable assist steering
Your vehicle is equipped with variable assist power steering. At low
engine RPM, steering assist will adjust to reduce efforts and improve low
speed maneuverability. At high engine RPM, the assist will adjust to
improve steering feel at high speeds.
If the amount of effort required to steer your vehicle changes while
driving at a constant engine RPM, have the power steering system
checked by your authorized dealer.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM
The air suspension system is designed to improve ride, handling and
general vehicle performance during:
Certain road conditions
Steering maneuvers
Braking
Acceleration
This system keeps the rear of your vehicle at a constant level by
automatically adding air or releasing air from the springs. If you exceed
the load limit, the rear air suspension may not operate. The air
suspension system will stay active for 40 minutes after the ignition is
turned off to accommodate any load changes. (The air compressor may
run when the vehicle is off; this is normal.)
The air suspension system can be enabled or disabled through the
message center. Refer to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
If the system is off, the rear air suspension will not operate and will not
raise (pump) or lower (vent) while the vehicle is not moving. However, if
the system determines that the vehicle is low or high and needs to make
a height adjustment while driving at speeds above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
system will pump or vent as required. Normal vehicle operation does not
require any action by the driver.
On vehicles equipped with air suspension, turn the air
suspension and the ignition switch off prior to jacking, hoisting
or towing your vehicle.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
204
background
PREPARING TO DRIVE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Your vehicle has special design and equipment features to make it
capable of performing in a wide variety of circumstances. These special
design features, such as larger tires and increased ground clearance, give
the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load,
hauling people and cargo may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Use extra caution while becoming familiar with your vehicle. Know the
capabilities and limitations of both you as a driver and your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock floor-shift transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
205
background
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed, or when the ignition is
in the OFF position, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s
brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the
Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to OFF, then remove the
key.
2. Using a screwdriver or similar
tool, remove the protective cover to
the interlock release access hole,
located to the right of the gearshift
lever.
3. Insert a screwdriver or similar
tool straight down into the access
hole and press downward while
pulling the gearshift lever out of the
P (Park) position and into the N
(Neutral) position.
4. Remove tool and reinstall the protective cover.
5. Start the vehicle and release the parking brake.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
206
background
Driving with a 6–speed automatic transmission
This vehicle is equipped with an
Adaptive Transmission Shift
Strategy. The Adaptive Transmission
Shift Strategy offers the optimal
transmission operation and shift
quality. When the engine is turned
off, the shift data which includes the
adaptive information will be stored
automatically in the Transmission
Control Module (TCM). If the
battery is disconnected for any
reason, the stored information from
the last time the key was turned to
OFF will be read. This way, no
information will be lost with any
battery removal or battery
disconnect.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
Depress the brake pedal
Start the engine
Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear. If your vehicle is
equipped with a floor-shift transmission, press the gearshift lever
release button (on the front of the lever) while shifting into the
desired gear.
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
Come to a complete stop
Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
207
background
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six except in 4X4 where transmission
operates in gears two through six.
D (Drive) without Overdrive
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the side of the gearshift
lever.
Transmission operates in gears one through four except in 4X4 where
transmission operates in gears two through six.
This position allows for all forward gears, 1–4; 5th and 6th gear are
not available.
Provides engine braking.
Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
O/D (overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
O/D
OFF
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
208
background
3 (Third)
Transmission operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Transmission operates in 2nd gear only.
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
Transmission operates in 1st gear only.
Provides maximum engine braking.
Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
Allowed in D (Drive) only.
Depress the accelerator to the floor.
Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with RSC, it may be
beneficial to turn the system off so the wheels are allowed to spin.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
209
background
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM
The reverse sensing system sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles
near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) gear is selected.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. The park assist is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R
(Reverse) and when using the reverse sensing system.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the
driver in detecting objects to avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may
not detect smaller objects, particularly those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the reverse sensing system may create false beeps.
The system will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while the
vehicle moves in reverse at speeds less than 6 mph (10 km/h). The
system is not effective at speeds greater than 6 mph (10 km/h) and may
not detect certain angular or moving objects.
The system detects obstacles within approximately 16 feet (five meters), at
speeds above 2.5 mph (4 km/h) behind the rear bumper with a decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. If vehicle speed is below
2.5 mph (4 km/h), the system detects obstacles within approximately 9 feet
(2.6 meters) behind the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
210
background
outer corners of the bumper. As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate
of the tone increases. When the distance to the obstacle is approximately
less than 18 inches (45.0 cm), the tone will sound continuously. If the
system detects an object that is approaching the vehicle at such a rate that
rapid braking is required, a very high rate tone will sound. If this tone is
heard while reversing, the driver is advised to slow down immediately until
the tone either changes to a slower rate or stops.
Audible Warnings
Distance to Object Warning
Speed above 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
up to 1.6 feet (.5 meters) Solid
1.6 feet (.5 meters) to 3.1 feet (1 meter) Fast beep
3.1 feet (1 meter) to 5.7 feet (1.8 meters) Medium/fast beep
5.7 feet (1.8 meters) to 9 feet (2.8 meters) Medium beep
9 feet (2.8 meters) to 13 feet (4 meters) Medium/slow beep
13 feet (4 meters) to 19.6 feet (6 meters) Slow beep
Speed below 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
up to 1.4 feet (.4 meters) Solid
1.4 feet (.4 meters) to 3 feet (.9 meters) Fast beep
3 feet (.9 meters) to 4.5 feet (1.4 meters) Medium beep
4.5 feet (1.4 meters) to 6.3 feet (1.9 meters) Medium/slow beep
6.3 feet (1.9 meters) to 8.7 feet (2.6 meters) Slow beep
8.7 feet (2.6 meters) to 16.4 feet (5 meters) No sound
The reverse sensing system is automatically enabled when the gear
selector is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON. A control in the
message center allows the driver to disable the system only when the
ignition is ON and the gear selector is in R (Reverse). Refer to Message
center in the Driver Controls chapter.
The message center will indicate the system is OFF and will not allow
the driver to switch the system ON to indicate a failure of the reverse
sensing system.
The radar sensor is located behind the rear bumper/fascia. Always
keep the rear bumper/fascia free from snow, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. These elements may cause the system to
operate inaccurately.
If the vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
211
background
CONTROL TRAC FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4X4) OPERATION
(IF EQUIPPED)
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.
Do not use 4X4 mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4X4 mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces.
Use of 4X4 mode on these surfaces may produce some noise (such as
occasional clunks) but will not damage drive components.
Your 4x4 features the heavy-duty Control Trac system which includes a
computer-operated transfer case. This unique system is interactive with
the road, continually monitoring and adjusting torque delivery to the
front and rear wheels to optimize vehicle control.
System indicator messages
The Control Trac system indicator messages display in the reconfigurable
telltale (RTT) location in the message center only under the following
conditions. If these messages display when driving in 4X2, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
4X4 AUTO displays when 4X4 AUTO is selected.
4X4 displays when 4X4 is selected.
Positions of the Control Trac system
The Control Trac system functions
in three modes:
4X2 (2WD) delivers power to
the rear wheels only. This is
appropriate for normal on-road
driving on dry pavement.
4X4 AUTO provides electronic
control four-wheel drive with power delivered to all four wheels, as
required, for increased traction. The RTT location in the message
center will display “4X4 AUTO” when this position is selected. This is
appropriate for all on-road driving conditions, such as dry road
surfaces, wet pavement, snow or gravel.
4X2
4X4
AUTO
4X4
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
212
background
4X4 provides electronically locked four-wheel drive power to front and
rear wheels. The RTT location in the message center will display “4X4”
when this position is selected. This position is not recommended for use
on dry pavement. This position is only intended for severe winter or
off-road conditions, such as deep snow, ice or shallow sand.
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering
at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles.
Note: The Control Trac selector switch should not be changed while the
rear wheels are slipping.
Shifting between modes
Press any button (4X2, 4X4 AUTO or 4X4) at any forward speed up to
55 mph (88 km/h). The message center may display “4X4 SHIFT IN
PROGRESS” during the system shift. The RTT location in the message
center will then display “4X4 AUTO” if 4X4 AUTO is selected or “4X4” if
4X4 is selected.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
Four–wheel drive vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand,
snow, mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
The AdvanceTrac with RSC stability enhancement system can be turned
off manually by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC button (refer to
AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control (RSC) Stability
Enhancement System in this chapter) while operating in 4X2, 4X4
AUTO or 4X4 while driving in deep sand, very deep snow or more
strenuous off-road maneuvers. This will disable the engine management
feature, allowing the vehicle to maintain full power and enhanced
momentum through the obstacle.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
213
background
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
Do not use 4X4 mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. This may damage
the drivelines and axles.
Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application. Ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
214
background
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
215
background
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Control Trac four–wheel drive system (if equipped)
When a four–wheel drive mode is selected, the Control Trac system uses
all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On
four–wheel drive vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select
four–wheel drive when necessary. Information on transfer case operation
and shifting procedures can be found in this chapter. Information on
transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some four–wheel drive models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive
to four–wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain
coming up to speed and engaging the front wheels, and is not cause for
concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Note: If air is released from your tires, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) indicator light may illuminate.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
216
background
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with RSC, press the
AdvanceTrac with RSC button (refer to AdvanceTrac with Roll
Stability Control (RSC) Stability Enhancement System in this
chapter) while driving in deep sand if you experience excessive engine
power reduction.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even four–wheel drive vehicles can lose traction in
slick mud. As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator
slowly and avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case, front axle or rear axle are submerged
in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
217
background
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
218
background
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be
able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle
and still maintain steering control.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
Four–wheel drive vehicles have advantages over two–wheel drive
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a four–wheel drive vehicle may
accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t
stop any faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four
wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake forcefully and
steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this
chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake
system.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
219
background
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
220
background
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available:
24–hours, seven days a week
for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or
36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire
inflation kit)
battery jump start
lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
winch out available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
towing Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $100 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
coverage period
exact fuel amounts
towing of your disabled vehicle
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
221
background
emergency travel expense reimbursement
travel planning benefits
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your authorized dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
instrument panel by the radio. The
hazard flashers will operate when
the ignition is in any position or if
the key is not in the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
222
background
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
FUEL
RESET
The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.
After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump
shut-off switch may have been activated.
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located in the left rear quarter trim
panel, near the liftgate. The switch
is located behind an access panel.
The fuel pump shut-off switch has a
red reset button on top of it.
Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by
pushing in on the reset button.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and
return the key to the OFF position.
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
223
background
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey
3A Violet Violet
4A Pink Pink
5A Tan Tan
7.5A Brown Brown
10A Red Red
15A Blue Blue
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A Orange Green Green
50A Red Red Red
60A Blue Yellow Yellow
70A Tan Brown
80A Natural Black
15
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
224
background
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located under the right-hand side of the instrument panel.
To remove the trim panel for access
to the fuse box, pull the panel
toward you and swing it out away
from the side and remove it. To
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the
grooves on the panel, then push it
shut.
To remove the fuse box cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the
cover, then pull the cover off.
To reinstall the fuse box cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear it click
shut. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is seated properly.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
225
background
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
1 30A Smart window #1
2 15A Driver side power seat memory
3 15A FES
4 30A Smart window #2
5 10A Keypad illumination, 3rd row seat
enable, Brake Shift Interlock
(BSI), SPDJB
6 20A Turn signals
7 10A Low beam headlamps (left)
8 10A Low beam headlamps (right)
9 15A Interior lights
10 15A Switch backlighting, Cargo lamps,
Puddle lamps
11 10A 4x4
12 7.5A Power mirror switch, Driver side
power seat memory, Driver side
power fold mirror relay motor
13 7.5A Power fold mirror motor, Digital
Signal Processing (DSP)
14 10A Clock, Power liftgate module
keep-alive power, Power running
board module keep-alive power
15 10A Climate control
16 15A Electronic parking brake release
17 20A All lock motor feeds, Liftgate
release, Liftglass release
18 20A Not used (Spare)
19 25A Rear wiper
20 15A Adjustable pedals, Datalink
21 15A Fog lamps
22 15A Park lamps relay
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
226
background
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
23 15A High beam headlamps
24 20A Horn relay
25 10A Demand lamps
26 10A Instrument panel cluster
27 20A Ignition switch
28 5A Radio
29 5A Instrument panel cluster
30 5A Not used (Spare)
31 10A Compass, Automatic dimming rear
view mirror
32 10A Restraints control module
33 10A Ebrake
34 5A Not used (spare)
35 10A Rear park assist, 4x4
36 5A PATS transceiver
37 10A Climate control
38 20A
Subwoofer/Amp (Audiophile radio)
39 20A Radio
40 20A Instrument panel amp, DSP,
Radio, 4x4 module
41 15A Radio
42 10A Upfitter relay coil, Trailer tow,
Battery charge coil
43 10A Rear wiper logic
44 10A Customer access feed
45 5A Front wiper logic
46 7.5A Not used (Spare)
47 30A Circuit
Breaker
Power windows, Moon roof
48 Delayed accessory relay
Note: Relays R301–R305 are not serviceable components; see your
authorized dealer for assistance.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
227
background
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to
the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
1 Blower relay
2 Not used
3 Rear window defroster relay
4 30A** Third row seats (driver side)
5 40A** Trailer tow connector (electric
brake)
6 60A ** ABS (valves)
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
228
background
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
7 40A** Power running boards
8 40A** Heated/cooled seats
9 60A** ABS (pump)
10 20A** Rear console power point
11 30A** Auxiliary blower
12 25A* Trailer tow connector (park
lamps)
13 30A* Trailer tow connector (battery
charge)
14 Not used
15 Not used
16 A/C clutch relay
17 Driver side HID low beam
headlamp relay
18 Fuel pump relay
19 Back-up relay
20 Trailer tow connector relay (left
turn signal)
21 Trailer tow connector relay (right
turn signal)
22 Passenger side HID low beam
headlamp relay
23 15A* Heated mirrors
24 40A** Blower motor
25 Not used
26 Not used
27 30A** Power liftgate
28 40A** Rear window defroster, Heated
mirror
29 30A** Passenger seat
30 10A* A/C clutch
31 15A* Brake lamps
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
229
background
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
32 20A* Fuel pump
33 20A* Back-up lamps
34 25A* Trailer tow connector (stop/turn
lamps)
35 20A* 4x4 module
36 10A* Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Keep alive power,
Canister vent
37 15A* Transmission B+
38 30A** Third row seats (passenger side)
39 50A** Air suspension pump
40 30A** Starter motor
41 20A** IP/Console power point
42 Not used
43 Not used
44 20A** Driver side HID low beam
headlamp
45 30A** Driver seat
46 40A** Run/Start bus bar
47 30A** Air suspension solenoids
48 20A** Passenger side HID low beam
headlamp
49 30A** Front wipers/washer
50 30A** PCM bus bar
51 20A** Cargo power point
52 20A** Cigarette lighter
53 Air suspension relay
54 Starter relay
55 Trailer tow connector relay (park
lamp)
56 Trailer tow connector relay
(battery charge)
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
230
background
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
57 Run/Start relay
58 Not used
59 PCM relay
60 Not used
61 A/C clutch diode
62 Fuel pump diode
63 15A* Trailer tow connector (back-up
lamp)
64 Not used
65 10A* Air suspension logic
66 Not used
67 10A* Blower coil
68 Not used
69 30A* Run/Start passenger
compartment fuse panel
70 20A* PCM (sensors) EFC, A/C clutch
coil
71 5A* Fuel coil, ISP-R
72 20A* PCM (ignition coils)
73 5A* Transmission ignition
74 20A* PCM (sensors) HEGO/CMS,
MAFS, EVMV, CMCV, Speed
deactivation switch, VCT
75 5A* 4x4 Integrated Wheel Ends
(IWE) solenoid
76 20A* PCM VPWR
77 10A* ABS logic, Heated PCV
* Mini Fuses ** Cartridge Fuses
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
231
background
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a conventional spare tire that is
different in one or more of the following: type, brand, size, speed rating
and tread design. If this is the case, this dissimilar spare tire is still rated
for your vehicle loads (GAWR and GVWR). This temporary spare tire is
not equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor.
The use of tire sealants may damage your tires. The use of tire
sealants may also damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in
the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important information. If
the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer
function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
232
background
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
Tow a trailer
Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
Use commercial car washing equipment
Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
Handling, stability and braking performance
Comfort and noise
Ground clearance and parking at curbs
Winter weather driving capability
Wet weather driving capability
For vehicles equipped with 4WD, it is not recommended that the vehicle
be operated in 4WD modes with a temporary emergency spare tire. If
4WD operation is necessary, do not operate above speeds of 10 mph
(16 km/h) or for distances above 50 miles (80 km).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
Use commercial car washing equipment
Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
Handling, stability and braking performance
Comfort and noise
Ground clearance and parking at curbs
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
233
background
Winter weather driving capability
Wet weather driving capability
All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
Towing a trailer
Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Spare tire information
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS), the system indicator light will illuminate when the spare
is in use. To restore the full functionality of the TPMS system, all road
wheels equipped with the tire pressure monitoring sensors must be
mounted on the vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, have a flat tire serviced by an
authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensor, refer
to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible.
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
Item Location
Spare tire Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Jack tools and jacking instructions Under the access panel located in
the floor compartment behind the
rear seat
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
234
background
Removing the jack and tools
1. Open the liftgate, then locate the
access panel on the floor behind the
3rd row seat. Unlatch and remove
the panel.
2. Remove the jack and tools
assembly tray from the
compartment by turning the
wing-nut counterclockwise to relieve
tension against the jack assembly
tray. Remove the bag from the jack
and tool assembly tray by loosening
the strap.
Note: Pay close attention to the orientation of the bag, because it will
have to be reinstalled after changing the tire.
3. Unsnap the wheel lug nut wrench, jack extension and handle from the
plastic tray. Remove the jack and instruction sheet from the tray
assembly.
Removing the spare tire
1. Fold the rear seat down. Refer to
Rear seats in the Seating and
safety restraints chapter.
2. Remove the jack handle and
winch extension from the tray and
assemble them.
3. Open the spare tire winch access
plug in the bottom of the
compartment located behind the 3rd
row seat, very close to the jack and
tools tray.
4. Insert the winch extension tool
assembly through the access hole in
the floor and engage the winch.
5. To remove the spare tire, turn the handle counterclockwise until the
tire is lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack.
6. Slide the retainer through the center of the spare tire wheel.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
235
background
Tire change procedure
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block the wheels (both
front or both rear) on the opposite end of the vehicle from the wheel
being changed. If on a grade, block both opposite wheels on the
downward side of the hill.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
On vehicles equipped with Air Suspension, turn OFF the Air
Suspension system prior to jacking, hoisting or towing your
vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with air suspension, refer to Message center
in the Driver Controls chapter for instructions on turning the air
suspension system off.
Refer to the instruction sheet (located in the rear floor compartment
behind the 3rd row seat with the jack tray tools assembly kit) for
detailed tire change instructions.
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
236
background
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park),
turn engine OFF and block the
wheels (both front or both rear) on
the opposite end of the vehicle from
the wheel being changed. If on a
grade, block both wheels on the
downward side of the hill.
3. Turn off the air suspension system (the air suspension system is
controlled through the message center. Refer to Air Suspension System
in the Driving section for more information). Also, turn OFF the
deployable running boards (if equipped. See Message center in the
Driver controls section).
4. Obtain the spare tire and jack from their storage locations.
5. Use the tip of the jack handle to
remove any wheel trim. Loosen each
wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off
the ground.
6. Position the jack according to the
jack locator arrows found on the
frame and turn the jack handle and
extension tool assembly clockwise.
Note: Use the frame rail as the
jacking point, NOT the control arm.
7. Lift the vehicle so the tire is no
further than 1 inch (2.5 cm) off the
ground when installing the spare tire.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
237
background
When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park). To prevent the vehicle
from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the parking brake
is set and the block the wheels (both front or both rear) on the
opposite end of the vehicle from the wheel being changed. If on a
grade, block both opposite wheels on the downward side of the hill. If
the vehicle slips off the jack, someone could be seriously injured.
Front
Rear
Turn off the running boards (if equipped) before jacking or
placing any object under the vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and the vehicle. A moving
running board may cause injury.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
238
background
Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your
body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the
engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for
changing the tire.
8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
9. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown and reinstall the wheel cover.
12. Unblock the wheels.
13. Put flat tire, jack, lug wrench
and tools away. Make sure the jack
is fastened securely so it does not
rattle when you drive.
14. Turn on the air suspension
system (if equipped). Refer to
Message center in the Driver Controls chapter for instructions on
turning the air suspension system on.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
239
background
Stowing the spare tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground, near the rear of the vehicle, with the valve
stem side facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under
the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. If
equipped, you may have to remove
the wheel center cap prior to
pushing the retainer through the
center of the wheel. To remove the
center cap, press it off with the jack
tool from the inner side of the
wheel. After doing so, pull on the
cable to align the components at the
end of the cable.
3. Assemble the jack handle and
winch extension (as shown in
illustration), then insert the winch
extension through the access hole
behind the 3rd row seat and engage the winch.
4. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The wrench will become harder to turn
and the spare tire winch will ratchet or slip when the tire is raised to
maximum tightness. A clicking sound will be heard from the winch
indicating that the tire is properly stowed.
5. Disassemble the jack tool and winch extension and snap them back
into the tool tray. Reinstall the jack bag properly around the jack and
tool assembly tray, making sure the strap is securely fastened. Close the
access hole with the rubber plug. Reinstall the tray into the vehicle and
secure it with the wing nut (turn clockwise until tight).
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
240
background
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft. Nm
M14 x 2.0 150 200
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to
the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
JUMP STARTING
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
241
background
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
242
background
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
+
+
+
+
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
243
background
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to the jump
starting stud located in the rear of the engine compartment, behind the
battery. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake
manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
+
+
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
244
background
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the jump starting stud.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
245
background
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
+
+
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
246
background
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
+
+
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
247
background
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Also, wrecker towing the vehicle
by the front frame-mounted tow hooks is not recommended or advised.
The air suspension control and the ignition must be turned off
before being towed. Refer to Air suspension in the Driving
chapter.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the
ground.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
248
background
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
With a disabled vehicle (without access to wheel dollies, car hauling
trailer or flatbed transport vehicle) your vehicle can be towed (all wheels
on the ground) under the following conditions:
Special Conditions:
Release the parking brake.
Turn the air suspension control to OFF.
Turn the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.
Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to Automatic transmission
operation in the Driving chapter for directions on how to move the
gearshift lever out of the P (Park) position, for proper towing.
Do not exceed a distance of 50 miles (80 km).
Do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) vehicle speed.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
249
background
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Lincoln or Mercury vehicle to an authorized dealer
for warranty repairs. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your
selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued
satisfaction. Please note that certain warranty repairs require special
training and/or equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the
warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair
after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made
using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Lincoln Mercury Customer
Relationship Center at 1-800-521-4140.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized
dealer could provide, after following the steps described above, contact
the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
250
background
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
Your telephone number (home and business)
The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized
dealer is located
The year and make of your vehicle
The date of vehicle purchase
The current odometer reading
The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish to
contact the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE program (U.S. only).
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
251
background
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
252
background
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful in
achieving satisfaction by following the three-step procedure outlined on
the front page of the Warranty Guide. However, if your warranty concern
has not been resolved using the three-step procedure, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and
arbitration. Initially, the BBB will try to resolve your question or concern
through mediation. Mediation is a process through which a
representative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore options
for settlement of your claim. If mediation is not successful, customers
with eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitration
process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after
the hearing. You are not bound by the decision but may choose to accept
it. If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford must
abide by the accepted decision as well. If the arbitrator has decided in
your favor and you accept the decision, the BBB AUTO LINE program
will contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in a
timely manner. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are
usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE, you will be asked for your
name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. You will then be mailed a Customer
Claim Form that you will need to complete, provide proof of vehicle
ownership, sign and return the Customer Claim Form to the BBB. Upon
receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program
Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1–800–955–5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
253
background
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer.
There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible
combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford
ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating authorized dealers.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
254
background
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer for
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or
visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1–800–392–3673.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
255
background
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owners guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
256
background
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
257
background
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces.
Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
If your vehicle is equipped with power deployable running
boards, you may experience noise while deploying the system
due to excessive grit and grime buildup. While the system is
unaffected by this buildup, it is important to wash the area
regularly in order to maintain the system’s optimal operation.
Exterior chrome
Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
Use Custom Brite Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from your
authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean
bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
258
background
Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
WAXING
Applying Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every six
months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
Wash the vehicle first.
Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your
vehicle’s color. Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s
door jamb) to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers.
Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
259
background
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
For plastic headlamp lenses, use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
260
background
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32–A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth, or use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
261
background
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the airbag system.
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
CLEANING THE CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner.
Remove fresh spots immediately. Clean the seat with a damp cloth, using
a mild soap and water solution, if necessary.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
262
background
LEATHER SEATS
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11-A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11-D), available from your authorized dealer.
Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (U.S. only) (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11–A)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
263
background
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate (ZC-6-A)
Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45)
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-17-B)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32–A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
264
background
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Owner Information Guide to find out which parts and services
are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not work on a hot engine.
Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and
all fuel related parts.
Turn off the power running boards, if equipped, before working
under the vehicle, jacking or placing any object under the
vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended running board
and the vehicle. A moving running board may cause injury.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
265
background
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
266
background
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
5.4L 3V–V8 engine
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Air filter assembly
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Power distribution box
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Battery
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
267
background
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to the
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the
windshield.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
268
background
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
It is recommended that wiper blades are renewed before winter.
To replace the wiper blades:
1. Fold back the wiper arm and
position the wiper blade at right
angles to the wiper arm.
2. To remove, press the retaining
clip (A) to disengage the wiper
blade, then pull the blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade on the
arm and press it into place until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
Changing rear window wiper blade
The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position. This reduces
the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash.
To replace the wiper blade:
1. Lift and hold the wiper blade off
the glass.
2. Press the release tab to unlock
wiper blade from wiper arm.
3. Pull the wiper blade toward the
base of the wiper arm and remove it
from the arm.
4. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
269
background
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
If the oil level is below this
mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
270
background
If required, add engine oil to the
engine. Refer to Adding engine
oil in this chapter.
Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
upper hole or the MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
271
background
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A.
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
272
background
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
273
background
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been
disconnected, refer to Shift strategy in the Driving chapter.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
274
background
Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or within the “COLD
FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
L
E
A
D
RETURN
RECYCLE
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
275
background
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B51-A1. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
276
background
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets or an
equivalent product meeting Ford specification WSS-M99B37-B6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, meeting Ford
specification WSS-M97B44-D, with the factory-filled coolant.
Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant or any
orange-colored extended life product with your factory filled coolant
can result in degraded corrosion protection.
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
277
background
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on
the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill
the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
278
background
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]):
It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot) area.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
279
background
The symbol will illuminate.
The
indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
The engine power will be limited.
The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
The engine will completely shut down.
Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
280
background
FUEL FILTER
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
281
background
Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent
injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not
be visible for hours.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
282
background
Refueling
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
Place approved fuel container on the ground.
DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 turn until it stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until at least a few clicks are
heard.
If the
symbol comes on and stays on after you start the engine, the
fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the engine, remove
the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
283
background
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that
are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally
contains more metallic additives than regular grade fuel. We recommend
using regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic
additives, but fuels free of such additives may be available; check with
your local fuel dealer.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
284
background
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium” unleaded
gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use “Regular”
unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more
pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It should
not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you
continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating. These
products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage
to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket
product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right
Fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
Normally, adding one gallon of fuel is enough to restart the engine. If
the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than one gallon
may be required.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
285
background
The indicator may come on. For more information on the “check
engine” or the “service engine soon” indicator, refer to Warning lights
and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles
(3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
Use the same filling rate setting (low medium high) each time
the tank is filled.
Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
286
background
Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy.
Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste fuel.
Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
Slow down gradually.
Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
287
background
You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (as much as
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
Close windows for high speed driving.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
288
background
EPA window sticker
The characteristics of the four wheel drive vehicle, like those of many,
similar competitive products, fit within categories where the fuel
economy labeling regulations do not apply. Therefore, the following
information applies only to the two wheel drive vehicle.
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the range of fuel economy expected on
the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy may vary
depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
Use only the specified fuel listed.
Avoid running out of fuel.
Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
289
background
Illumination of the indicator, charging system warning light or the
temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of
engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not
working properly.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
indicator should stay off
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
290
background
the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional
vehicle service is required.
If the
indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the
OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving
with the
indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel
economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and lead to more
costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test if the
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned
out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission
control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle
is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the
indicator is on or the bulb does not work, the vehicle may
need to be serviced. Refer to the On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the
indicator blinks
eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the
indicator stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
291
background
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
information for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is
necessary, use MERCON ATF.
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir.
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
M
A
X
M
IN
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
292
background
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer. If
required, fluid should be added by an authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Locate the Mass Air Flow Sensor
electrical connector on the air outlet
tube. This connector will need to be
unplugged.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
293
background
2. Reposition the locking clip on the
connector (connector shown from
below for clarity), squeeze the
connector and pull it off of the air
outlet tube.
3. Clean the area around the air
tube to air cover connection to
prevent debris from entering the
system and then loosen the bolt on
the air tube clamp so the clamp is
no longer snug to the air tube. It is
not necessary to completely remove
the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air
cleaner housing.
5. Release the three clamps that
secure the cover to the air filter
housing. Push the air filter cover
toward the center of the vehicle and
up slightly to release it.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
294
background
6. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
7. Install a new air filter element.
8. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover and ensure that
the tabs on the edge are properly
aligned into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air filter
housing and tighten the air-tube
clamp bolt snugly, but do not
overtighten it.
10. Reconnect the Mass Air Flow
Sensor electrical connector to the
outlet tube. Make sure the locking
tab on the connector is in the
“locked” position (connector shown
from below for clarity).
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
295
background
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 5.4L 3V V8 engine
Air filter element FA-1883
Battery
BXT-65-650 or
BXT-65-750 (if equipped)
Fuel filter FG-986B
Oil filter FL-820-S
PCV valve
1
Spark plugs
2
1
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
2
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
296
background
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Item Capacity Ford part number
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Brake fluid
Fill to line on
reservoir
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A
Hinges, latches, striker
plates and rotors, seat
tracks, fuel filler door
hinge and spring
Multi-Purpose Grease
XG-4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders
Motorcraft Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 /
None
Engine coolant (Base
radiator without aux
rear heat)
20.6 quarts
(19.5L)
Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
1
VC-7-B /
WSS-M97B51-A1
Engine coolant (Heavy
duty trailer tow radiator
without aux rear heat)
21.1 quarts
(20.0L)
Engine coolant (Base
radiator with aux rear
heat)
23.2 quarts
(22.0L)
Engine coolant (Heavy
duty trailer tow radiator
with aux rear heat)
23.8 quarts
(22.5L)
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
297
background
Item Capacity Ford part number
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Cooling system stop
leak pellets
Motorcraft Cooling
System Stop Leak Pellets
VC-6 /
WSS-M99B37-B6
Engine oil 7.0 quarts (6.6 L)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor
Oil
2
XO-5W20-QSP (US)
CXO-5W20- LSP12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C930-A and API
Certification Mark
Automatic transmission
fluid
(6HP26)
11.0 quarts
(10.5L)
3
Motorcraft MERCON SP
ATF
4
XT-6-QSP /
MERCON SP
Power steering fluid
Fill between MIN
and MAX lines on
reservoir
Motorcraft MERCON
ATF
XT-2-QDX /
MERCON
Front axle fluid (4X4)
3.5-3.7 pints
(1.8-2.0L)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle Lube
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Rear axle
fluid–Conventional
differential
(9.75 inch axle)
4.5 pints (2.13L)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lube
5
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Transfer case fluid
(4X4)
2.0 quarts (1.9L)
Motorcraft MERCON
ATF
XT-2-QDX /
MERCON
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
298
background
Item Capacity Ford part number
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Windshield washer fluid 4.5 quarts (4.1L)
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
ZC-32-A /
WSB-M8B16-A2
Fuel tank
28.0 gallons
(106L)
——
1
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
2
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler.
4
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON SP should only use MERCON SP fluid. Use of a
dual usage fluid in an automatic transmission requiring MERCON SP may cause transmission
damage. Refer to scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval.
Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
5
Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and is considered lubricated
for life. These lubricants are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is
required or the axle has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time
the axle has been submerged in water.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
299
background
ENGINE DATA
Engine 5.4L V8 engine
Cubic inches 330
Required fuel 87 octane
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Ignition system Coil on plug
Spark plug gap
1
0.040–0.050 inch (1.02–1.27 mm)
Compression ratio 9.85:1
1
Spark plug gap not adjustable
Engine drivebelt routing
5.4L V8 Engine
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
300
background
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
301
background
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
System
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
Description Code
Six-speed automatic (6HP26) G
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
302
background
GENUINE LINCOLN ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Lincoln Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer. These
quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln’s
rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Lincoln
Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted
for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that Genuine Lincoln Accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by a dealer are covered for the full length of
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty 4 years or 50,000 miles
(80,000 km) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Following is a list of several Genuine Lincoln Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories are
available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online
store at: www.lincolnaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Chrome exhaust tips
Deflectors
Running boards
Splash guards
Step bars
Wheels
Interior style
Floor mats
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
303
background
Lifestyle
Ash cup / smoker’s package
Cargo organization and management
Cross bars
Towing mirrors
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
Mobile-Ease hands-free communication system
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Wheel locks
Not all accessories are available for all models.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
304
background
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................196
Accessory delay ..........................57
AdvanceTrac ..............................199
Air cleaner filter ...............293, 296
Air suspension ...........................204
description ..............................204
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................133, 137, 139
and child safety seats ............135
description ..............133, 137, 139
disposal ....................................142
driver airbag ............135, 138, 140
indicator light .................137, 142
operation .................135, 138, 140
passenger airbag .....135, 138, 140
side airbag ...............................137
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................275
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................196–197
Anti-theft system
arming the system ..................103
Audio system (see Radio) .........18
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................207
fluid, adding ............................293
fluid, checking ........................293
fluid, refill capacities ..............297
fluid, specification ..................297
Auxiliary Input Jack ...................24
Auxiliary power point .................54
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........297
refill capacities ........................297
B
Battery .......................................273
acid, treating emergencies .....273
jumping a disabled battery ....241
maintenance-free ....................273
replacement, specifications ...296
servicing ..................................273
BeltMinder ...............................129
Brakes ........................................196
anti-lock ...........................196–197
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................197
fluid, checking and adding ....292
fluid, refill capacities ..............297
fluid, specifications .................297
lubricant specifications ..........297
parking ....................................198
shift interlock ..........................205
Bulbs ............................................44
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....297
Cargo management system ........87
Cell phone use ..............................7
Changing a tire .........................232
Child safety restraints ..............143
child safety belts ....................143
Child safety seats ......................146
in front seat ............................148
in rear seat ......................148, 150
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............260
instrument panel ....................261
interior .....................................262
interior trim ............................262
plastic parts ............................260
safety belts ..............................262
washing ....................................258
waxing .....................................259
wheels ......................................259
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
305
background
wiper blades ............................261
Clock ............................................54
Compass, electronic
set zone adjustment .................72
Console ........................................53
overhead ..............................51–52
rear ............................................53
Controls
power seat ...............................107
steering column ........................64
Coolant
checking and adding ..............275
refill capacities ................278, 297
specifications ..........................297
Cruise control (see Speed
control) ........................................61
Customer Assistance ................221
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................254
Getting assistance outside
the U.S. and Canada ..............255
Getting roadside assistance ...221
Getting the service you
need .........................................250
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................256
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................254
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................40
Defrost
rear window ..............................38
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................293
engine oil .................................270
Driving under special
conditions ..................209, 215, 218
sand .........................................216
snow and ice ...........................219
through water .................217, 220
DVD system .................................32
E
Electronic message center .........71
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................241
Emission control system ..........289
Engine ........................................300
cleaning ...................................260
coolant .....................................275
fail-safe cooling .......................279
idle speed control ...................273
lubrication specifications .......297
refill capacities ........................297
service points ..........................267
starting after a collision .........223
Engine block heater .................195
Engine oil ..................................270
change oil soon warning,
message center .......................270
checking and adding ..............270
dipstick ....................................270
filter, specifications ........272, 296
recommendations ...................272
refill capacities ........................297
specifications ..........................297
Exhaust fumes ..........................195
F
Fail safe cooling ........................279
Floor mats ...................................83
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
306
background
Fluid capacities .........................297
Foglamps .....................................39
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......212
control trac .............................212
description ..............................212
driving off road .......................213
indicator light .........................212
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................205
Fuel ............................................281
calculating fuel
economy ............................74, 286
cap ...........................................283
capacity ...................................297
choosing the right fuel ...........284
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................289
detergent in fuel .....................285
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................281, 283, 286
filter, specifications ........281, 296
fuel pump shut-off switch .....223
improving fuel economy ........286
octane rating ...................284, 300
quality ......................................285
running out of fuel .................285
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................281
Fuses ..................................224–225
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............283
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................286
Gauges .........................................15
H
Hazard flashers .........................222
Headlamps ...................................39
aiming ........................................41
autolamp system .......................39
bulb specifications ....................44
daytime running lights .............40
flash to pass ..............................40
high beam .................................40
turning on and off ....................39
Homelink wireless control
system ..........................................67
Hood ..........................................266
I
Ignition ...............................192, 300
Illuminated visor mirror .............51
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................146
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................291
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................261
cluster ........................................10
J
Jack ............................................232
positioning ...............................232
storage .....................................232
Jump-starting your vehicle ......241
K
Keyless entry system
autolock ...............................89, 91
keypad .....................................101
locking and unlocking doors ..102
programming entry code .......101
Keys ...................................102–104
positions of the ignition .........192
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
307
background
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................39
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................44
daytime running light ...............40
fog lamps ...................................39
headlamps .................................39
headlamps, flash to pass ..........40
interior lamps ...............42–43, 45
replacing bulbs .........................47
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................42
Liftgate ......................83, 87, 95–96
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........197
Load limits .................................178
Loading instructions .................184
Locks
autolock ...............................89, 91
childproof ..................................93
doors ..........................................89
Lubricant specifications ...........297
Lug nuts ....................................241
Luggage rack ...............................88
Lumbar support, seats .............106
M
Message center ...........................71
english/metric button ...............78
system check button ................78
warning messages .....................79
Mirrors .........................................58
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................57
fold away ...................................58
heated ........................................59
programmable memory ............97
signal .........................................59
Moon roof ....................................66
Motorcraft parts ........263, 281, 296
N
Navigation system .......................32
O
Octane rating ............................284
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................270
P
Panic alarm feature, remote
entry system ................................96
Parking brake ............................198
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....296
Pedals (see Power adjustable
foot pedals) .................................59
Power adjustable foot pedals .....59
Power deployable running
boards ..........................................60
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) .......................225, 228
Power door locks ........................89
Power liftgate ..............................83
Power mirrors .............................58
Power point .................................54
Power steering ..................203–204
fluid, checking and adding ....292
fluid, refill capacity ................297
fluid, specifications .................297
Power Windows ...........................55
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
308
background
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................205
R
Radio ............................................18
Rear window defroster ...............38
Relays ........................................224
Remote entry system .................93
illuminated entry ....................100
locking/unlocking doors .....93–94
opening the trunk ...............95–96
panic alarm ...............................96
replacement/additional
transmitters ...............................99
replacing the batteries .............98
Reverse sensing system ...........210
Roadside assistance ..................221
Roof rack .....................................88
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........128
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..................119, 122–126
Safety Canopy ...................137, 139
Safety defects, reporting ..256–257
Safety restraints ........119, 122–126
BeltMinder ............................129
extension assembly ................128
for adults .........................123–125
for children .....................142–143
safety belt maintenance .........128
warning light and chime ........129
Safety seats for children ..........146
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................301
Satellite Radio Information ........29
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) .............119
Seats ..........................................106
child safety seats ....................146
climate control ........................110
memory seat .....................97, 109
SecuriLock passive
anti-theft system ...............102–104
Servicing your vehicle ..............265
Snowplowing .................................7
Spare tire
(see Changing the Tire) ...........234
Spark plugs, specifications ......296,
300
Special notice
utility-type vehicles ....................7
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................297
Speed control ..............................61
Starting your vehicle ........192–194
jump starting ..........................241
Steering wheel
controls ......................................64
tilting .........................................50
T
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Driving .....................................216
Roadside Emergencies ...........232
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....174
Warning Displays ................10, 79
Tires ...........................159–161, 232
alignment ................................168
care ..........................................164
changing ..................232, 234, 236
checking the pressure ............164
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
309
background
inflating ...................................162
label .........................................173
replacing ..................................165
rotating ....................................168
safety practices .......................167
sidewall information ...............169
snow tires and chains ............178
spare tire .................................232
terminology .............................161
tire grades ...............................160
treadwear ........................160, 164
Towing .......................................184
recreational towing .................191
trailer towing ..........................184
wrecker ....................................248
Transmission .............................205
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....205
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................293
fluid, refill capacities ..............297
lubricant specifications ..........297
Trunk .....................................95–96
Turn signal ..................................42
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................301
Vehicle loading ..........................178
Ventilating your vehicle ...........195
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
Washer fluid ..............................268
Water, Driving through .............220
Windows
power .........................................55
rear wiper/washer .....................50
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................49
checking and adding fluid .....268
liftgate reservoir .....................268
replacing wiper blades ...........269
Wrecker towing .........................248
2007 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
310
background
311
background
312

Specifications

Lincoln LINCOLN 2007 NAVIGATOR Questions and Answers

Questions and Answers

Related Products